Technical Manual DB Series Planters Diagnosis and Repair

DB Series Planters
Diagnosis and Repair
TECHNICAL MANUAL
DB Series Planters Diagnosis and
Repair
TM2091 26JAN06 (ENGLISH)
For complete service information also see:

COMPUTER TRAK 350 and 450
Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM2064
SEEDSTAR Generation 2, Map Based
Seeding and Variable Rate Fertilizer . . . . . . TM2099
John Deere Seeding Group

LITHO IN U.S.A.
Introduction
Foreword
This manual is written for an experienced technician. Information is organized in groups for the various
Essential tools required in performing certain service components requiring service instruction. At the
work are identified in this manual and are beginning of each group are summary listings of all
recommended for use. applicable essential tools, service equipment and tools,
other materials needed to do the job, service parts kits,
Live with safety: Read the safety messages in the specifications, wear tolerances, and torque values.
introduction of this manual and the cautions presented
throughout the text of the manual. Technical Manuals are concise guides for specific
machines. They are on-the-job guides containing only
the vital information needed for diagnosis, analysis,
This is the safety-alert symbol. When you see this
testing, and repair.
symbol on the machine or in this manual, be alert to
the potential for personal injury.
Fundamental service information is available from
other sources covering basic theory of operation,
Technical manuals are divided in two parts: repair and
fundamentals of troubleshooting, general maintenance,
operation and tests. Repair sections tell how to repair
and basic type of failures and their causes.
the components. Operation and tests sections help you
identify the majority of routine failures quickly.
KC01776,0001456 –19–20DEC02–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) DB Series Planters

012606
PN=2
Contents
10
SECTION 10—General Information Group 15A—Auxiliary Power Outlet Diagnostics
Group 05—Safety Group 15B—CCS Seed Delivery Agitator
Group 10—Lubricants Diagnostics
Group 15—General Information Group 15C—CCS Low Tank Warning Diagnostics
Group 15D—CCS Planter Raise/Lower Diagnostics
20
SECTION 20—Vacuum System Group 15E—CCS Seed Delivery Fan Diagnostics
Group 05—Vacuum Meter System Group 15F—CCS Tank Fill Lights Diagnostics
Group 15G—Field Raise-Lower Diagnostics
SECTION 25—Central Commodity System Group 15H—Half Width Disconnect Diagnostics
Group 05—Seed Tanks and Manifolds Group 15I—Lighting Overall Diagnostics
Group 10—Seed Delivery Hose Group 15J—Machine Fold-Unfold Diagnostics 25
Group 15—Central Commodity System Fan Group 15K—Marker Raise-Lower - Manual Mode
Group 20—Polyethylene Tank Repair Diagnostics
Group 15L—Tongue Latch Diagnostics
SECTION 30—Planting Units Group 15M—Tongue Lift Diagnostics
Group 05—MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Group 15N—Transport Lift Diagnostics
30
Vacuum Seed Metering Mechanisms Group 20—Connector Locations
Group 10—MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP
Plateless Seed Metering Mechanisms SECTION 270—Hydraulic Diagnosis and Test
Group 15—PRO-SERIES XP Vacuum Seed Group 05—General Information
Metering Mechanisms Group 15A—CCS Seed Delivery Fan Motor
Group 20—Seed Openers Diagnostics 35
Group 25—Closing Wheels Group 15B—Field Raise - Lower Diagnostics
Group 30—Insecticide/Herbicide Meter Group 15C—Fold-Unfold Diagnostics
Group 35—Coulter Group 15D—Left Marker Diagnostics
Group 40—Down Force Springs Group 15E—Right Marker Diagnostics
Group 15F—Tongue Latch Diagnostics
50
SECTION 35—Hitch and Frame Group 15G—Tongue Lift Diagnostics
Group 05—Repair and Welding Group 15H—Tongue Lift (Independent) Diagnostics
Group 15I—Transport Lift Diagnostics
Group 15J—Wing Wheel Transport Diagnostics
SECTION 50—Drives
Group 20—Hydraulic Components
Group 05—Specifications
70
Group 10—Drive Wheels
Group 20—Seed Drive Transmission
Group 30—Drillshaft
Group 40—Half-Width Disconnect
Group 45—Variable Rate Drive
240
SECTION 70—Hydraulics
Group 05—Motors
Group 10—Miscellaneous
SECTION 240—Electrical Diagnosis and Test 270

Group 05—How To Use This Diagnostic Information
Group 10—Solenoid Sequence Table
All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on

the latest information available at the time of publication. The right is
reserved to make changes at any time without notice. INDX
COPYRIGHT  2006
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright  2002, 2003, 2004
TM2091 (26JAN06) i DB Series Planters

012606
PN=1
Contents
10
20
25
30
35
50
70
240
270
INDX
TM2091 (26JAN06) ii DB Series Planters

012606
PN=2
10
Section 10
General Information
Contents
Page
Group 05—Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-05-1
Group 10—Lubricants
Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-1
Gear Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-1
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants . . . . . . . . .10-10-2
Lubricant Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-2
Group 15—General Information

Unauthorized Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-2
Sealants and Adhesives Cross-Reference
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-4
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values . . . . . . . .10-15-5
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values . . .10-15-6
Face Seal Fittings Assembly and
Installation—All Pressure Applications . . . . . .10-15-7
Metric Face Seal Fitting Torque
Chart—Standard Pressure Applications . . . . .10-15-8
Metric Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—High
Pressure Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-9
SAE Face Seal Fitting Torque
Chart—Standard Pressure Applications . . . .10-15-10
SAE Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—High
Pressure Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-11
Four Bolt Flange Fittings Assembly and
Installation—All Pressure Applications . . . . .10-15-12
SAE Four Bolt Flange Cap Screw Torque
Values—Standard Pressure Applications . . .10-15-13
SAE Four Bolt Flange Cap Screw Torque
Values—High Pressure Applications . . . . . .10-15-14
External Hexagon Port Plug Torque Chart . . .10-15-15
TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=1
Contents
10

012606
PN=2
Group 05
Safety
10
Recognize Safety Information 05
1
This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol

on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the
potential for personal injury.
–UN–07DEC88
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating
practices.
T81389
DX,ALERT –19–29SEP98–1/1
Understand Signal Words
A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is

used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the
most serious hazards.
DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near
–19–30SEP88
specific hazards. General precautions are listed on
CAUTION safety signs. CAUTION also calls attention to
safety messages in this manual.
TS187
DX,SIGNAL –19–03MAR93–1/1
Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires
When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near

heaters or other fire hazards.
Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Do not

incinerate or puncture pressurized containers.
–UN–23AUG88
Make sure machine is clean of trash, grease, and debris.
Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn

spontaneously. TS227
DX,FLAME –19–29SEP98–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=7
Safety
10
05 Prepare for Emergencies
2
Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
–UN–23AUG88
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.
TS291
DX,FIRE2 –19–03MAR93–1/1
Avoid Harmful Asbestos Dust
Avoid breathing dust that may be generated when

handling components containing asbestos fibers. Inhaled
asbestos fibers may cause lung cancer.
Components in products that may contain asbestos fibers
–UN–23AUG88
are brake pads, brake band and lining assemblies, clutch
plates, and some gaskets. The asbestos used in these
components is usually found in a resin or sealed in some
way. Normal handling is not hazardous as long as
TS220
airborne dust containing asbestos is not generated.
Avoid creating dust. Never use compressed air for

cleaning. Avoid brushing or grinding material containing
asbestos. When servicing, wear an approved respirator. A
special vacuum cleaner is recommended to clean
asbestos. If not available, apply a mist of oil or water on
the material containing asbestos.
Keep bystanders away from the area.
DX,DUST –19–15MAR91–1/1

012606
PN=8
Safety
10
Practice Safe Maintenance 05
3
Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep

area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is

moving. Keep hands, feet , and clothing from
power-driven parts. Disengage all power and operate
controls to relieve pressure. Lower equipment to the
ground. Stop the engine. Remove the key. Allow machine
to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be

raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. Fix

damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground

cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical systems
–UN–23AUG88
or welding on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from

tractor before servicing electrical system components or
TS218
welding on machine.
DX,SERV –19–17FEB99–1/1

012606
PN=9
Safety
10
05 Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
4
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
–UN–23AUG88
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
X9811
and body from high pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid

injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a
few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with
this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available from Deere
& Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,FLUID –19–03MAR93–1/1
Park Machine Safely
Before working on the machine:
• Lower all equipment to the ground.

• Stop the engine and remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery ground strap.
–UN–24MAY89
• Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.
TS230
DX,PARK –19–04JUN90–1/1

012606
PN=10
Safety
10
Support Machine Properly 05
5
Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground

before you work on the machine. If the work requires that
the machine or attachment be lifted, provide secure
support for them. If left in a raised position, hydraulically
supported devices can settle or leak down.
–UN–23AUG88
Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tiles,
or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not
work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.
TS229
Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a

machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the
implement or attachment operator’s manual.
DX,LOWER –19–24FEB00–1/1
Wear Protective Clothing
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

appropriate to the job.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment

or loss of hearing.
–UN–23AUG88
Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as
earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or
uncomfortable loud noises.
TS206
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
DX,WEAR –19–10SEP90–1/1

012606
PN=11
Safety
10
05 Handle Agricultural Chemicals Safely
6
Chemicals used in agricultural applications such as

fungicides, herbicides, insecticides, pesticides,
rodenticides, and fertilizers can be harmful to your health
or the environment if not used carefully.
–UN–23AUG88
Always follow all label directions for effective, safe, and
legal use of agricultural chemicals.
Reduce risk of exposure and injury:
TS220
• Wear appropriate personal protective equipment as
recommended by the manufacturer. In the absence of
manufacturer’s instructions, follow these general
guidelines:
– Chemicals labeled ’Danger’: Most toxic. Generally
require use of goggles, respirator, gloves, and skin
protection.
–UN–11OCT88
– Chemicals labeled ’Warning’: Less toxic. Generally
require use of goggles, gloves, and skin protections.
– Chemicals labeled ’Caution’: Least toxic. Generally
require use of gloves and skin protection.
• Avoid inhaling spray or dusts.
A34471
• Always have soap, water, and towel available when
working with chemicals. If chemical contacts skin,
hands, or face, wash immediately with soap and water.
If chemical gets into eyes, flush immediately with water.
• Wash hands and face after using chemicals and before
eating, drinking, smoking, or urination.
• Do not smoke or eat while applying chemicals.
• After handling chemicals, always bathe or shower and
change clothes. Wash clothing before wearing again.
• Seek medical attention immediately if illness occurs
during or shortly after use of chemicals.
• Keep chemicals in original containers. Do not transfer
chemicals to unmarked containers or to containers used
for food or drink.
• Store chemicals in a secure, locked area way from
human or livestock food. Keep children away.
• Always dispose of containers properly. Triple rinse
empty containers and puncture or crush containers and
dispose of properly.
DX,WW,CHEM01 –19–05OCT04–1/1

012606
PN=12
Safety
10
Avoid Contact with Pesticides 05
7
This enclosed cab does not protect against inhaling

harmful pesticides. If pesticide use instructions require
respiratory protection, wear an appropriate respirator
inside the cab.
–UN–23AUG88
Before leaving the cab, wear personal protective
equipment as required by the pesticide use instructions.
When re-entering the cab, remove protective equipment
and store either outside the cab in a closed box or some
TS220
other type of sealable container or inside the cab in a
pesticide resistant container, such as a plastic bag.
Clean your shoes or boots to remove soil or other

contaminated particles prior to entering the cab.
–UN–23AUG88
TS272
DX,CABS –19–03MAR93–1/1
Clean Vehicle of Hazardous Pesticides
CAUTION: During application of hazardous

pesticides, pesticide residue can build up on
the inside or outside of the vehicle. Clean
vehicle according to use instructions of
hazardous pesticides.
When exposed to hazardous pesticides, clean exterior

and interior of vehicle daily to keep free of the
accumulation of visible dirt and contamination.
1. Sweep or vacuum the floor of cab.
2. Clean headliners and inside cowlings of cab.
3. Wash entire exterior of vehicle.
4. Dispose of any wash water with hazardous

concentrations of active or non-active ingredients
according to published regulations or directives.
DX,CABS2 –19–24JUL01–1/1

012606
PN=13
Safety
10
05 Work in Clean Area
8
Before starting a job:
• Clean work area and machine.

• Make sure you have all necessary tools to do your job.
–UN–18OCT88
• Have the right parts on hand.
• Read all instructions thoroughly; do not attempt
shortcuts.
T6642EJ
DX,CLEAN –19–04JUN90–1/1
Service Machines Safely
Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie,

scarf, loose clothing, or necklace when you work near
machine tools or moving parts. If these items were to get
caught, severe injury could result.
–UN–23AUG88
Remove rings and other jewelry to prevent electrical
shorts and entanglement in moving parts.
TS228
DX,LOOSE –19–04JUN90–1/1
Work In Ventilated Area
Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it is

necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area, remove
the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust pipe
extension.
–UN–23AUG88
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
doors and get outside air into the area
TS220
DX,AIR –19–17FEB99–1/1
Illuminate Work Area Safely
Illuminate your work area adequately but safely. Use a

portable safety light for working inside or under the
machine. Make sure the bulb is enclosed by a wire cage.
The hot filament of an accidentally broken bulb can ignite
spilled fuel or oil.
–UN–23AUG88
TS223
DX,LIGHT –19–04JUN90–1/1

012606
PN=14
Safety
10
Replace Safety Signs 05
9
Replace missing or damaged safety signs. See the

machine operator’s manual for correct safety sign
placement.
–UN–23AUG88
TS201
DX,SIGNS1 –19–04JUN90–1/1
Use Proper Lifting Equipment
Lifting heavy components incorrectly can cause severe

injury or machine damage.
Follow recommended procedure for removal and

installation of components in the manual.
–UN–23AUG88
TS226
DX,LIFT –19–04JUN90–1/1

012606
PN=15
Safety
10
05 Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating
10
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated

by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
–UN–23AUG88
Remove paint before heating:
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area

to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
TS220
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes
before welding or heating.
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding

will take place.
Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic

fumes and dust away.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
DX,PAINT –19–24JUL02–1/1
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines
Flammable spray can be generated by heating near

pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to
yourself and bystanders. Do not heat by welding,
soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or
other flammable materials. Pressurized lines can
–UN–15MAY90
accidentally burst when heat goes beyond the immediate

flame area.
TS953
DX,TORCH –19–10DEC04–1/1

012606
PN=16
Safety
10
Service Tires Safely 05
11
Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause

serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper

equipment and experience to perform the job.
–UN–12APR90
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld or
heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause an
TS952
increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension

hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged

rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.
DX,TIRECP –19–24AUG90–1/1
Use Proper Tools
Use tools appropriate to the work. Makeshift tools and

procedures can create safety hazards.
Use power tools only to loosen threaded parts and

fasteners.
–UN–08NOV89
For loosening and tightening hardware, use the correct
size tools. DO NOT use U.S. measurement tools on
metric fasteners. Avoid bodily injury caused by slipping
wrenches. TS779
Use only service parts meeting John Deere specifications.
DX,REPAIR –19–17FEB99–1/1

012606
PN=17
Safety
10
05 Construct Dealer-Made Tools Safely
12
Faulty or broken tools can result in serious injury. When

constructing tools, use proper, quality materials, and good
workmanship.
–UN–01JUL97
Do not weld tools unless you have the proper equipment
and experience to perform the job.
LX1016749
DX,SAFE,TOOLS –19–10OCT97–1/1
Dispose of Waste Properly
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the

environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
–UN–26NOV90
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
TS1133
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can

damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste

from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN –19–03MAR93–1/1
Live With Safety
Before returning machine to customer, make sure

machine is functioning properly, especially the safety
systems. Install all guards and shields.
–19–07OCT88
TS231
DX,LIVE –19–25SEP92–1/1

012606
PN=18
Group 10
Lubricants
10
Grease 10
1
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the

expected air temperature range during the service interval.
John Deere SD POLYUREA GREASE is preferred.
The following greases are also recommended
• John Deere HD LITHIUM COMPLEX GREASE

• John Deere HD WATER RESISTANT GREASE
• John Deere GREASE-GARD
Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
–UN–31OCT03
NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are

not compatible with others. Consult
TS1673
your grease supplier before mixing
different types of grease
GREASE-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company DX,GREA1 –19–07NOV03–1/1
Gear Oil
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature

range during the period between oil changes.
The following oils are preferred:
• John Deere GL-5 GEAR LUBRICANT

• John Deere EXTREME-GARD
Other oils may be used if they meet API Service

Classification GL-5. –UN–14MAR96
TS1653
EXTREME-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company. DX,GEOIL –19–07JUL99–1/1

012606
PN=19
Lubricants
10
10 Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants
2
Conditions in certain geographical areas may require

lubricant recommendations different from those printed in
this manual.
Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not

be available in your location.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information and

recommendations.
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the

performance requirements as shown in this manual.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in this

manual apply to both conventional and synthetic oils.
Re-refined base stock products may be used if the

finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER –19–15JUN00–1/1
Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
when clean lubricants are used. identify their contents.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants. Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
lubricant they may contain.
Whenever possible, store lubricants and containers in
an area protected from dust, moisture, and other
contamination. Store containers on their side to avoid
water and dirt accumulation.
DX,LUBST –19–18MAR96–1/1

012606
PN=20
Group 15
General Information
10
Unauthorized Modifications 15
1
CAUTION: Unauthorized modification can affect

safe operation of the machine. Do not modify
machine from its original design and function.
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the

function of the machine service life and void machine
warranty.
AG,OUO1021,3 –19–03NOV98–1/1

012606
PN=21
General Information
10
15 Specifications
2
DB44 DB58 DB60 DB66 DB80 DB90
Frame:
Type Three-section Three-section Three-section Three-section Three-section Five-section
front-fold front-fold front-fold front-fold front-fold front-fold
Tool bar 178 x 178 mm (7 178 x 178 mm (7 178 x 178 mm (7 178 x 178 mm (7 178 x 178 mm (7 x 178 x 178 mm (7 x
x 7 in.) x 7 in.) x 7 in.) x 7 in.) 7 in.) 7 in.)
Location of row
units on frame:
Center section 8 units 10 units 10 units 10 units 6 units 6 units
On each wing 8 units 11 units 13 units 13 units 13 units 8 and 7 units
Flexibility Wing flex 15 degrees relative to the center frame
(wings)
Lift system type Wheel module
Control Electrohydraulic series rephasing cylinders
Number of 10 (4 for wheel modules, 1 for tongue, 2 for markers, 2 for folding and 1 for latch) 12 (6 for wheel
cylinders modules, 1 for
tongue, 2 for
markers, 2 for
folding, 1 for latch)
Central Commodity System Seed Tanks 3,525 L (100 bu) capacity
Refuge Plus Seed Tank 881 L (25 bu) capacity

Tires:
Transport tires 4 - 31 - 13.5 x 15 4 - 16.5 x 16.1 4 - 16.5 x 16.1 4 - 16.5 x 16.1 4 - 16.5 x 16.1 4 - 16.5 x 16.1
Drive tires/wings 4 - 31 - 13.5 x 15 4 - 31 - 13.5 x 15 4 - 31 - 13.5 x 15 4 - 31 - 13.5 x 15 4 - 31 - 13.5 x 15 8 - 31 - 13.5 x 15
Seed 9.50 x 18 4 PR turf tire
transmission tire
(2)
Drives Tire contact ground drive - 2 transmissions
Number of rows 24 rows on 56 cm 32 rows on 56 cm 36 rows on 51 cm 36 rows on 56 cm 32 rows on 76 cm 36 rows on 76 cm
(22-in.) spacing (22-in.) spacing (20-in.) spacing (22-in.) spacing (30-in.) spacing (30-in.) spacing
Planting units:
Meter - standard MAXEMERGE Vacuum (2 blower system)
Meter - optional MAXEMERGE (finger pick-up/feed cup)
Meter - w/CCS PRO-SERIES Vacuum (2 blower system)

Capacities per
row:
Seed 1.6 bu. (0.6 m3) 1.6 bu. (0.6 m3) 1.6 bu. (0.6 m3) 1.6 bu. (0.6 m3) 1.6 bu. (0.6 m3) 1.6 bu. (0.6 m3)
3 3 3 3 3
*3.0 bu. (1.1 m ) *3.0 bu. (1.1 m ) *3.0 bu. (1.1 m ) *3.0 bu. (1.1 m ) *3.0 bu. (1.1 m ) *3.0 bu. (1.1 m3)
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CD6 –19–18JAN06–1/2

012606
PN=22
General Information
10
Insecticide only 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 15
3
Herbicide only 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg) 70 lb (32 kg)
Herbicide and 35 lb (16 kg) 35 lb (16 kg) 35 lb (16 kg) 35 lb (16 kg) 35 lb (16 kg) 35 lb (16 kg)
insecticide
* Not compatible with granular chemical hopper

Marker system Fold-over hydraulic markers
Monitor system CT450 COMPUTER TRAK monitor system or SEEDSTAR Generation 2
Tractor hitch Drawbar (with drawbar support system)
required
Minimum tractor 4,536 kg 4,536 kg 4,536 kg 4,536 kg 4,536 kg 4,990 kg
drawbar support (10,000 lbs) (10,000 lbs) (10,000 lbs) (10,000 lbs) (10,000 lbs) (11,000 lbs)
strap rating
required
Minimum tractor 235 PTO 235 PTO 235 PTO 235 PTO 235 PTO 280 PTO
horsepower Horsepower Horsepower Horsepower Horsepower Horsepower Horsepower
required
Number of SCVs 2 (Standard) 2 (Standard) 2 (Standard) 2 (Standard) 3 (Standard) 4 (Standard)
required 3 (if equipped 3 (if equipped 3 (if equipped 3 (if equipped 4 (if equipped 5 (if equipped
with vacuum seed with vacuum seed with vacuum seed with vacuum seed with vacuum seed with vacuum seed
metering) metering) metering) metering) metering) metering)
4 (if equipped 4 (if equipped 4 (if equipped 4 (if equipped 5 (if equipped
with SEEDSTAR with SEEDSTAR with SEEDSTAR with SEEDSTAR with SEEDSTAR
variable rate variable rate variable rate variable rate variable rate
drive) drive) drive) drive) drive)
Maximum tractor 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi 3,000 psi
hydraulic (20,700 kPa) (20,700 kPa) (20,700 kPa) (20,700 kPa) (20,700 kPa) (20,700 kPa)
operating
pressure
Transport width 4.57 m (15 ft) 5.36 m (17 ft, 6 4.88 m (16 ft) 5.36 m (17 ft, 6 4.88 m (16 ft) 4.88 m (16 ft)
in.) in.)
Transport length 11.28 m (37 ft) 12.5 m (41 ft) 12.5 m (41 ft) 14 m (46 ft) 15.25 m (50 ft) 16.75 m (55 ft)
Transport height 3.05 m (10 ft) 3.05 m (10 ft) 3.05 m (10 ft) 3.05 m (10 ft) 3.7 m (12 ft) 3.7 m (12 ft)
Estimated 12,247 kg 13,245 kg 13,517 kg 13,835 kg 14,515 kg 15,422 kg
weight (27,000 lb) (29,200 lb) (29,800 lb) (30,500 lb) (32,000 lb) (34,000)
COMPUTER TRAK is a trademark of Deere & Company

SEEDSTAR is a trademark of Deere & Company OUO6046,0001CD6 –19–18JAN06–2/2

012606
PN=23
General Information
10
15 Sealants and Adhesives Cross-Reference Chart
4
U.S. Part Number Canadian Part Color Size Description LOCTITE
Number Number
Bonding
PM37513 PM38606 BLACK and 4 gm Epoxy Adhesive 445

WHITE
PM37391 PM38615 CLEAR 2 gm Gel Super Glue 454
Gasketing
PM38655 PM38625 PURPLE 50 mL Flexible Form-in-Place Gasket 515

PM37559 PM38600 BROWN 4 oz General Purpose Gasket Dressing —
PM38657 PM38628 BLUE 50 mL High-Flex Form-in-Place Gasket 17430
PM37553 — BURGUNDY 16 oz High Tack Gasket Dressing —
PM37465 PM38616 METALLIC 80 mL Ultra Blue RTV Silicone 587
BLUE
H154379 — Green — Sealant —
Priming
PM37509 PM38611 GREEN 4.5 oz Cure Primer 7649
Retaining
PM38651 PM38612 SILVER 50 mL QUICK METAL Press Fit 660

PM37485 — GREEN 36 mL Maximum Strength 680
PM38652 PM38626 GREEN 36 mL High-Temperature 620
Thread Locking and Sealing
PM37477 PM38622 BLUE 36 mL Medium Strength 242

PM37418 PM38621 BLUE 6 mL Medium Strength 242
PM38654 PM38623 RED 36 mL High Strength 271
PM37398 PM38613 WHITE 6 mL Pipe Sealant with TEFLON 592
PM37397 PM38613 WHITE 50 mL Pipe Sealant with TEFLON 592
LOCTITE is a trademark of Loctite Corp.

QUICK METAL is a trademark of Loctite Corp.
TEFLON is a trademark of Du Pont Co. OUO1073,0001CA7 –19–12AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=24
General Information
10
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values 15
5
–UN–01MAY03
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
TS1670
Bolt or Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Screw Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb
Size N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in
M6 4.7 42 6 53 8.9 79 11.3 100 13 115 16.5 146 15.5 137 19.5 172
N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft
M8 11.5 102 14.5 128 22 194 27.5 243 32 23.5 40 29.5 37 27.5 47 35
N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft
M10 23 204 29 21 43 32 55 40 63 46 80 59 75 55 95 70
N•m lb-ft
M12 40 29.5 50 37 75 55 95 70 110 80 140 105 130 95 165 120
M14 63 46 80 59 120 88 150 110 175 130 220 165 205 150 260 190
M16 100 74 125 92 190 140 240 175 275 200 350 255 320 235 400 300
M18 135 100 170 125 265 195 330 245 375 275 475 350 440 325 560 410
M20 190 140 245 180 375 275 475 350 530 390 675 500 625 460 790 580
M22 265 195 330 245 510 375 650 480 725 535 920 680 850 625 1080 800
M24 330 245 425 315 650 480 820 600 920 680 1150 850 1080 800 1350 1000
M27 490 360 625 460 950 700 1200 885 1350 1000 1700 1250 1580 1160 2000 1475
M30 660 490 850 625 1290 950 1630 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2140 1580 2700 2000
M33 900 665 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1625 2500 1850 3150 2325 2900 2150 3700 2730
M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2770 4750 3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
of the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners
value or tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For with the same or higher property class. If higher property class
stainless steel fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make
instructions for the specific application. Tighten plastic insert or sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start thread
crimped steel type lock nuts by turning the nut to the dry torque engagement. When possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners
shown in the chart, unless different instructions are given for the other than lock nuts, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different
specific application. instructions are given for the specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20 and larger fasteners with
JDM F13C zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 –19–24APR03–1/1

012606
PN=25
General Information
10
15 Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values
6 TS1671 –UN–01MAY03
Bolt or SAE Grade 1 SAE Grade 2a SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
b c b c b c
Screw Lubricated Dry Lubricated Dry Lubricated Dry Lubricatedb Dryc
Size N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in N•m lb-in
1/4 3.7 33 4.7 42 6 53 7.5 66 9.5 84 12 106 13.5 120 17 150
N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft
5/16 7.7 68 9.8 86 12 106 15.5 137 19.5 172 25 221 28 20.5 35 26
N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft
3/8 13.5 120 17.5 155 22 194 27 240 35 26 44 32.5 49 36 63 46
N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft
7/16 22 194 28 20.5 35 26 44 32.5 56 41 70 52 80 59 100 74
N•m lb-ft
1/2 34 25 42 31 53 39 67 49 85 63 110 80 120 88 155 115
9/16 48 35.5 60 45 76 56 95 70 125 92 155 115 175 130 220 165
5/8 67 49 85 63 105 77 135 100 170 125 215 160 240 175 305 225
3/4 120 88 150 110 190 140 240 175 300 220 380 280 425 315 540 400
7/8 190 140 240 175 190 140 240 175 490 360 615 455 690 510 870 640
1 285 210 360 265 285 210 360 265 730 540 920 680 1030 760 1300 960
1-1/8 400 300 510 375 400 300 510 375 910 670 1150 850 1450 1075 1850 1350
1-1/4 570 420 725 535 570 420 725 535 1280 945 1630 1200 2050 1500 2600 1920
1-3/8 750 550 950 700 750 550 950 700 1700 1250 2140 1580 2700 2000 3400 2500
1-1/2 990 730 1250 930 990 730 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
crimped steel type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always replace shear or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
bolts with identical grade. specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6. in (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6 in. (152 mm) long,
and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in. and larger fasteners with
JDM F13C zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ1 –19–24APR03–1/1

012606
PN=26
General Information
10
Face Seal Fittings Assembly and Installation—All Pressure Applications 15
7
Face Seal O-Ring to Stud End Installation Face Seal Straight Stud End O-Ring Installation
1. Inspect the fitting surfaces. They must be free of 1. Install a thimble over the fitting threads to protect
dirt and/or defects. the O-ring from nicks.
2. Inspect the O-ring. It must be free of damage 2. Slide the O-ring over the thimble into the turned
and/or defects. down section of the fitting.
3. Lubricate O-rings and install into groove using 3. Remove thimble.

petroleum jelly to hold in place.
Fitting Installation
4. Push O-ring into groove with petroleum jelly so
O-ring is not displaced during assembly. 1. Install fitting by hand until snug.
5. Index angle fittings and tighten by hand pressing 2. Position adjustable fittings by unscrewing the fitting
joint together to ensure O-ring remains in place. no more than one turn.
6. Tighten fitting or nut to torque value shown on the 3. Apply assembly torque per table.
chart per dash size stamped on the fitting. DO NOT
allow hoses to twist when tightening fittings. Assembly Torque
Face Seal Adjustable Stud End O-Ring Installation 1. Use one wrench to hold the connector body and
one wrench to tighten nut.
1. Back off lock nut (jam nut) and washer to full
exposed turned down section of the fitting. 2. For a hydraulic hose, it may be necessary to use
three wrenches to prevent twist; one on the
2. Install a thimble over the fitting threads to protect connector body, one on the nut, and one on the
the O-ring from nicks. body of the hose fitting.
3. Slide the O-ring over the thimble into the turned

down section of the fitting.
4. Remove thimble.
OUO6435,0001557 –19–17DEC01–1/1

012606
PN=27
General Information
10
15 Metric Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—Standard Pressure Applications
8
A B
C D
–UN–12DEC01
E
H F
F
H70406
E
A—90° Swivel Elbow and Tube C—Stud Straight and Tube Nut E—Stud End G—Swivel Nut
Nut D—Bulkhead Union and F—Tube Nut H—Lock Nut
B—90° Adjustable Stud Elbow Bulkhead Lock Nut
Metric Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—Standard Pressure—Below 27.6 MPA (4,000 PSI), Working Pressure-27.6 MPA (4,000 PSI)
Nominal Tube OD/Hose Face Seal Tube/Hose End O-Ring Stud Ends
ID
Metric Inch Tube OD Thread Hex Tube Bulkhead Lock Thread Hex Steel or Gray Aluminum
Tube Size Size Nut/Swivel Nut Nut Torquea Size Size Iron Torquea Torquea
OD Torquea
mm Dash in. in. mm N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft in. mm N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft
Size
6 -4 0.250 9/16-18 17 16 12 12 9 M12 x 1.5 17 21 15.5 9 6.6
8 -5 0.312 — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — M14 x 1.5 19 33 24 15 11
10 -6 0.375 11/16-16 22 24 18 24 18 M16 x 1.5 22 41 30 18 13
12 -8 0.500 13/16-16 24 50 37 46 34 M18 x 1.5 24 50 37 21 15
16 -10 0.625 1-14 30 69 51 62 46 M22 x 1.5 27 69 51 28 21
20 -12 0.750 1-3/16-12 36 102 75 102 75 M27 x 2 32 102 75 46 34
22 -14 0.875 1-3/16-12 36 102 75 102 75 M30 x 2 36 Not Established
25 -16 1.000 1-7/16-12 41 142 105 142 105 M33 x 2 41 158 116 71 52
28 — — — — — — — — M38 x 2 46 176 130 79 58
32 -20 1.25 1-11/16-12 50 190 140 190 140 M42 x 2 50 190 140 85 63
38 -24 1.50 2-12 60 217 160 217 160 M48 x 2 55 217 160 98 72
a
Tolerance is +15%, minus 20% of mean tightening torque unless otherwise specified
OUO6435,000154D –19–29NOV01–1/1

012606
PN=28
General Information
10
Metric Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—High Pressure Applications 15
9
A B
C D
–UN–12DEC01
E
H F
F
H70406
E
Metric Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—High Pressure—Above 27.6 MPA (4,000 PSI), Working Pressure-41.3 MPA (6,000 PSI)
Nominal Tube OD/Hose ID Face Seal Tube/Hose End O-Ring Stud Ends
Metric Inch Tube OD Thread Hex Tube Nut/Swivel Bulkhead Lock Thread Hex Steel or Gray Iron
Tube Size Size Nut Torquea Nut Torquea Size Size Torquea
OD
mm Dash in. in. mm N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft in. mm N•m lb-ft
Size
6 -4 0.250 9/16-18 17 16 12 12 9 M12 x 1.5 17 35 26
8 -5 0.312 — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — M14 x 1.5 19 45 33
10 -6 0.375 11/16-16 22 24 18 24 18 M16 x 1.5 22 55 40
12 -8 0.500 13/16-16 24 50 37 46 34 M18 x 1.5 24 70 50
16 -10 0.625 1-14 30 69 51 62 46 M22 x 1.5 27 100 75
20 -12 0.750 1-3/16-12 36 102 75 102 75 M27 x 2 32 170 125
22 -14 0.875 1-3/16-12 36 102 75 102 75 M30 x 2 36 215 160
25 -16 1.000 1-7/16-12 41 142 105 142 105 M33 x 2 41 310 225
28 — — — — — — — — M38 x 2 46 320 235
32 -20 1.25 1-11/16-12 — — — — — M42 x 2 50 330 240
38 -24 1.50 2-12 — — — — — M48 x 2 55 420 300
a
Tolerance is +15%, minus 20% of mean tightening torque unless otherwise specified.
OUO6435,000154E –19–29NOV01–1/1

012606
PN=29
General Information
10
15 SAE Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—Standard Pressure Applications
10
A B
C D
–UN–12DEC01
E
H F
F
H70406
E
SAE Inch Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—Standard Pressure-Below 27.6 MPA (4,000 PSI), Working Pressure-27.6 MPA (4,000 PSI)
Metric Inch Tube OD Thread Tube Nut/Swivel Nut Bulkhead Lock Nut Thread Straight Fitting or
Tube OD Size Torquea Torquea Size Lock Nut Torquea
mm Dash in. mm in. N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft in. N•m lb-ft
Size
5 -3 0.188 4.76 — — — — — 3/8-24 8 6
6 -4 0.250 6.35 9/16-18 16 12 12 9 7/16-20 12 9
8 -5 0.312 7.94 — — — — — 1/2-20 16 12
10 -6 0.375 9.52 11/16-16 24 18 24 18 9/16-18 24 18
12 -8 0.500 12.70 13/16-16 50 37 46 34 3/4-16 46 34
16 -10 0.625 15.88 1-14 69 51 62 46 7/8-14 62 46
20 -12 0.750 19.05 1-3/16-12 102 75 102 75 1-1/16-12 102 75
22 -14 0.875 22.22 1-3/16-12 102 75 102 75 1-3/16-12 122 90
25 -16 1.000 25.40 1-7/16-12 142 105 142 105 1-5/16-12 142 105
32 -20 1.25 31.75 1-11/16-12 190 140 190 140 1-5/8-12 190 140
38 -24 1.50 38.10 2-12 217 160 217 160 1-7/8-12 217 160
a
Tolerance is +15%, minus 20% of mean tightening torque unless otherwise specified
OUO6435,0001546 –19–16NOV01–1/1

012606
PN=30
General Information
10
SAE Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—High Pressure Applications 15
11
A B
C D
–UN–12DEC01
E
H F
F
H70406
E
SAE Inch Face Seal Fitting Torque Chart—High Pressure—Above 27.6 MPA (4,000 PSI), Working Pressure-41.3 MPA (6,000 PSI)
Metric Inch Tube OD Thread Tube Nut/Swivel Nut Bulkhead Lock Nut Thread Straight Fitting or
Tube OD Size Torquea Torquea Size Lock Nut Torquea
mm Dash in. mm in. N•m lb-ft N•m lb-ft in. N•m lb-ft
Size
5 -3 0.188 3.76 — — — — — 3/8-24 — —
6 -4 0.250 6.35 9/16-18 16 12 12 9 7/16-20 21 15
8 -5 0.312 7.94 — — — — — 1/2-20 — —
10 -6 0.375 9.52 11/16-16 24 18 24 18 9/16-18 34 25
12 -8 0.500 12.70 13/16-16 50 37 46 34 3/4-16 73 55
16 -10 0.625 15.88 1-14 69 51 62 46 7/8-14 104 76
20 -12 0.750 19.05 1-3/16-12 102 75 102 75 1-1/16-12 176 130
22 -14 0.875 22.22 1-3/16-12 102 75 102 75 1-3/16-12 230 170
25 -16 1.000 25.40 1-7/16-12 142 105 142 105 1-5/16-12 285 210
a
Tolerance is +15%, minus 20% of mean tightening torque unless otherwise specified.
OUO6435,000154A –19–20NOV01–1/1

012606
PN=31
General Information
10
15 Four Bolt Flange Fittings Assembly and Installation—All Pressure Applications
12
1. Inspect the sealing surfaces for nicks or scratches, With the flange centrally located on the port, hand
roughness or out-of-flat condition. Scratches cause tighten cap screws to hold it in place. Do not pinch
leaks. Roughness causes seal wear. Out-of-flat O-ring.
causes seal extrusion. If these defects cannot be
polished out, replace the component. 5. For both single piece flange and split flange, be
sure the components are properly positioned and
2. Install the correct O-ring (and backup washer if cap screws are hand tight. Tighten one cap screw,
required) into the groove using petroleum jelly to then tighten the diagonally opposite cap screw.
hold it in place. Tighten the two remaining cap screws. Tighten all
cap screws within the specified limits shown in the
3. For split flange; loosely assemble split flange chart.
halves, being sure that the split is centrally located
and perpendicular to the port. Hand tighten cap DO NOT use air wrenches. DO NOT tighten one
screws to hold parts in place. Do not pinch O-ring. cap screw fully before tightening the others. DO
NOT overtighten.
4. For single piece flange; put hydraulic line in the
center of the flange and install four cap screws.
OUO6435,0001558 –19–17DEC01–1/1

012606
PN=32
General Information
10
SAE Four Bolt Flange Cap Screw Torque Values—Standard Pressure Applications 15
13
–UN–30NOV01
H70423
SAE Four Bolt Flange Cap Screw Torque Values—27,600 KPA (4,000 PSI) Pressure Applications
Torque
Newton Meters Foot Pounds
a, b
Nominal Flange Size Screw Size Min Max Min Max
1/2 5/16-18 UNC 20 31 15 23
3/4 3/8-16 UNC 28 54 21 40
1 3/8-16 UNC 37 54 27 40
1-1/4 7/16-14 UNC 47 85 35 63
1-1/2 1/2-13 UNC 62 131 46 97
2 1/2-13 UNC 73 131 54 97
2-1/2 1/2-13 UNC 107 131 79 97
3 5/8-11 UNC 187 264 138 195
3-1/2 5/8-11 UNC 158 264 117 195
4 5/8-11 UNC 158 264 117 195
5 5/8-11 UNC 158 264 117 195
a
JDM A17D, SAE Grade 5 or better cap screws with plated hardware.
b
1.5.1.2 Lock washers are permissible but not recommended.
OUO6435,0001549 –19–20NOV01–1/1

012606
PN=33
General Information
10
15 SAE Four Bolt Flange Cap Screw Torque Values—High Pressure Applications
14
–UN–30NOV01
H70423
SAE Four Bolt Flange Cap Screw Torque Values—41,400 KPA (6,000 PSI) Pressure Applications
Torque
Newton Meters Foot Pounds
a, b
Nominal Flange Size Screw Size Min Max Min Max
1/2 5/16-18 UNC 20 31 15 23
3/4 3/8-16 UNC 34 54 25 40
1 7/16-14 UNC 57 85 42 63
1-1/4 1/2-13 UNC 85 131 63 63
1-1/2 5/8-11 UNC 159 264 117 195
2 3/4-10 UNC 271 468 200 345
a
JDM A17D, SAE Grade 5 or better cap screws with plated hardware.
b
1.5.1.2 Lock washers are permissible but not recommended.
OUO6435,000154C –19–29NOV01–1/1

012606
PN=34
General Information
10
External Hexagon Port Plug Torque Chart 15
15
Port or Stud End Thread Sizea Torque
+15%/-20%
M8 x 1 10 N•m (89 lb-in.)
M10 x 1 17 N•m (150 lb-in.)
–UN–30NOV01
M12 x 1,5 28 N•m (20.6 lb-ft)
M14 x 1,5 39 N•m (28.7 lb-ft)
M16 x 1,5 48 N•m (35.4 lb-ft)
H70356
M18 x 1,5 60 N•m (44.2 lb-ft)
M20 x 1,5 60 N•m (44.2 lb-ft)
M22 x 1,5 85 N•m (62.7 lb-ft)
M27 x 2 135 N•m (99.6 lb-ft)
M30 x 2 165 N•m (121.7 lb-ft)
M33 x 2 235 N•m (173.3 lb-ft)
M38 x 2 245 N•m (180.7 lb-ft)
M42 x 2 260 N•m (191.8 lb-ft)
M48 x 2 290 N•m (213.9 lb-ft)
M60 x 2 330 N•m (243.4 lb-ft)
a
Port to JDS-G173.1; stud end to JDS-G173.3.
OUO6435,0001822 –19–08AUG02–1/1

012606
PN=35
General Information
10
15
16

012606
PN=36
Section 20
Vacuum System
Contents 20
Page
Group 05—Vacuum Meter System

Essential or Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-1
Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-1
Vacuum Gauge Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-2
Setting Vacuum Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-3
Check Row Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-4
Vacuum Manifold Dual Blower System . . . . . . .20-05-6
Clean Vacuum Manifold System . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-9
Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-10
Inspect Vacuum Blower Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-11
Remove Vacuum Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-12
Install Vacuum Blower Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-13

012606
PN=1
Contents
20

012606
PN=2
Group 05
Vacuum Meter System
Essential or Recommended Tools
NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICEGARD or RECOMMENDED TOOLS, as noted, are suggested to
European Microfiche Tool Catalogs. perform the job correctly. Some tools may be available
from local suppliers or may be fabricated.
20
ESSENTIAL TOOLS listed are required to perform the 05
job correctly and are obtainable only from 1
SERVICEGARD or European Microfiche Tool
Catalogs.
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company KC01776,00014D6 –19–20DEC02–1/2
Universal Puller Assembly1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDM9A
Used to remove impeller from vacuum pump motor.
–UN–15SEP99
A43660
1
RECOMMENDED TOOL
KC01776,00014D6 –19–20DEC02–2/2
Other Material
Number Name Use
PM37477 (U.S.) Thread Lock and Sealer (Medium To lock/seal impeller assembly to
PM38622 (Canadian) Strength) motor shaft.
242 (LOCTITE)
OUO6046,0001C57 –19–11AUG05–1/1
Specifications
Item Measurement Specification
Motor Shaft Nut Torque 19 N•m

(168 lb-in.)
OUO6046,0001C52 –19–15MAR04–1/1

012606
PN=39
Vacuum Meter System
Vacuum Gauge Adjustment
1. Turn vacuum pump off.
2. Disconnect vacuum monitor line.

20
05
–UN–21MAY92
2 3. Holding vacuum gauge in vertical position adjust screw
(A), setting gauge pointer exactly on zero.
4. Connect monitor line; then activate vacuum pump
H44503
hydraulics.
5. Fill seed disk cells with seed.

A—Zero Adjusting Screw
6. Adjust vacuum level to recommended setting. (See
Machine Operators Manual.)
KC01776,00014D9 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=40
Vacuum Meter System
Setting Vacuum Level
1. Vacuum level is indicated on vacuum gauge.
NOTE: The vacuum level will be slightly lower during

20
tractor and pump start-up. 05
3
2. Set vacuum level as follows:
a. (6000, 7000, 8000 and 9000 Series Tractors) Push

SCV lever to forward detent position to start blower.
Let oil warm up for 15 minutes.
(30—60 Series Tractors) Pull lever back against

rubber stop. Let oil warm up for 15 minutes.
b. Fill hoppers with seed.
c. Lower machine in plant position, drive tractor

forward approximately 5 m (15 ft) to fill seed cells.
IMPORTANT: The hydraulic hook-up procedure will

determine whether the tractor flow
control valve or planter flow control
valve will be used to control vacuum
level. (See Machine Operators Manual.)
d. Turn hydraulic control knob to adjust oil flow until

vacuum-gauge indicator points to vacuum level
specified. (See Machine Operators Manual.)
KC01776,00014DA –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=41
Vacuum Meter System
Check Row Vacuum
NOTE: The left-hand vacuum gauge is reading the

vacuum on rows 8 and 9. The right-hand vacuum
gauge is reading the vacuum on rows 24 and 25.
20
05
–UN–27NOV95
4 1. Remove hopper from rows 8, 9, 24 and 25 and
suspected problem meter. (Position may vary on
different model configurations.)
A38260
2. Disengage hopper latch (A). Lift hopper upward then
rearward.
A—Hopper Latch
KC01776,00014DB –19–20DEC02–1/2
3. Remove vacuum line (A) and hose (B) from meter

dome.
4. Remove dome from housing.
5. Replace dome on suspected problem meter with dome

removed in step 4.
–UN–23FEB95
6. Attach a 6 mm (1/4 in.) ID hose, long enough to reach
from vacuum gauge to meter being checked.
A36749
7. Plug any vacuum lines that were disconnected.
8. Each row should indicate approximate same inches of A—Vacuum Line

B—Hose
H20 reading.
KC01776,00014DB –19–20DEC02–2/2

012606
PN=42
Vacuum Meter System
20
05
5

012606
PN=43
Vacuum Meter System
Vacuum Manifold Dual Blower System
20
05 A D
6 I
B
E
C
B
G G
B
F
D B
B
H H
B
F
I
B
E J
I I G
G B
F I
K C
I
E H
H
E G
H
I
I A
–UN–26SEP02
H
A50381
Dual Vacuum Manifold Assembly
Continued on next page KC01776,00014DC –19–15JUL05–1/4

012606
PN=44
Vacuum Meter System
A—Cap (2 used) D—Clamp G—Manifold J—Vacuum Blower

B—Clamp, Hose E—Manifold Tube H—Manifold, Bracket K—Hose
C—Clamp, Tube F—Manifold Seal I—O-Ring
Use as a guide when disassembling or assembling

right- and left-hand wing manifold. Left-hand wing 20
manifold is shown. Right-hand wing is similar. 05
7

012606
PN=45
Vacuum Meter System
20
05 B
8
C
D
B
D
B
H
D
F
B
–UN–29OCT01
A48050
Dual Vacuum Manifold Extension
A—Manifold C—Manifold Seal E—Air Duct, Tee G—Manifold

B—Clamp, Tube D—Back-Up Ring F—Cap H—Hose

012606
PN=46
Vacuum Meter System
Use as a guide when disassembling or assembling system. Left-hand wing manifold extension is shown.
right- and left-hand wing extension with dual blower Right-hand wing manifold extension is similar.
KC01776,00014DC –19–15JUL05–4/4 20
05
9
Clean Vacuum Manifold System
1. Start vacuum pump motor.
2. Remove vacuum hoses (A) from meters, one at a time.
–UN–19DEC95
3. Shake vacuum hose to remove dirt and sediment.
4. Install vacuum hose to meter.
A38259
5. Remove end cap (B) from both ends of manifold tube,
vacuum blower will exhaust dirt from manifold.
6. Replace end caps on both ends of manifold tube.
A—Vacuum Hose
B—End Cap
–UN–12DEC01
A48414
KC01776,00014DD –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=47
Vacuum Meter System
Flow Control Valve
20
05
10
–UN–26OCT99
A43664
Continued on next page KC01776,00014DE –19–20DEC02–1/2

012606
PN=48
Vacuum Meter System
A—Knob D—O-Ring G—Orifice J—Valve

B—Lock Nut E—Back-Up Ring (2 used) H—O-Ring K—Valve Body
C—O-Ring F—Service Kit I—Cap L—Control Valve
Use as a guide when disassembling and assembling psi). Optional silver orifice flows 6.75 GPM which
flow control valve. provides additional vacuum required for sweet corn 20
and edible bean seed disk. Black orifice is also used 05
11
NOTE: The flow control valve is used with dual when motor bypass, load sense or bleed off hydraulic
vacuum manifold system and/or older tractors. lines are used. This larger orifice compensates for
(See Machine Operators Manual for proper reduced flow to the motor.
installation.)
Two orifice sizes are available. The black orifice

(standard) flows 5.5 GPM at 6.9 bar (690 kPa) (100
KC01776,00014DE –19–20DEC02–2/2
Inspect Vacuum Blower Motor
NOTE: A small amount of oil leakage (moist area)

between the motor and blower housing is
acceptable.
1. Check vacuum motor (A) for oil leaks, making sure all
–UN–04FEB04
fittings are tight.
2. Inspect vacuum blower guard for dust or seed
A53731
inoculant/treatment.
3. Clean blower guard with a rag or a small brush when

necessary. A—Vacuum Motor
OUO6046,0001906 –19–09JAN06–1/1

012606
PN=49
Vacuum Meter System
Remove Vacuum Blower Motor E

A F
CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping fluid
under pressure, relieve the pressure in the B
20 system and stop engine before disconnecting G
05 or connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
12 L
all connections before applying pressure. C D
H
1. Remove blower assembly from planter. (See procedure J
in this group.)
M
2. Remove cap screws (E and K) and separate plate (F) P N

I
from housing (P). O
K
3. Remove nut (H) and washers (I) and (J).
T Q
IMPORTANT: A flywheel puller must be used to
–UN–05JUL05
remove impeller (M) to prevent possible R
damage to motor. S
4. Remove impeller (M) from tapered motor shaft, using
A56690
JDM9A Universal Puller Assembly. U V
5. Remove round head bolts (O), washers (R), nuts (S)

and motor (Q).
A—Flange Nut (4 used)
B—Bracket
C—Accumulator
D—Ring
E—Cap Screw (8 used)
F—Plate
G—Screw (4 used)
H—Nut
I—Lock Washer
J—Washer
K—Screw (4 used)
L—Guard
M—Impeller
N—Shaft Key
O—Round Head Bolt (2 used)
P—Housing –UN–21SEP99
Q—Motor
R—Washer (2 used)
S—Lock Nut (2 used)
T—Cap Screw (2 used)
A43666
U—Washer (2 used)
V—Lock Nut (2 used)
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001C26 –19–15JUL05–1/2

012606
PN=50
Vacuum Meter System
6. Inspect blower motor and repair or replace as

necessary.
OUO6046,0001C26 –19–15JUL05–2/2 20
05
13
Install Vacuum Blower Motor E
A F
1. Install motor onto vacuum pump housing using round
head bolts (O), washers (R) and nuts (S).
B
G
2. Install impeller (M) on motor shaft with shaft key (N).
L
3. Apply PM37477 Thread Lock and Sealer (Medium C D
Strength) to threads on motor shaft. H
J
4. Install flat washer (J), lock washer (I) and nut (H) on M
motor shaft. Tighten nut to specification. P N
I
O
Specification
K
Motor Shaft Nut—Torque ............................................................... 19 N•m
(168 lb-in.)
T Q
5. Install plate (F) to housing (P) using cap screws (E and
–UN–05JUL05
K). R
S
6. Install blower assembly onto planter. (See procedure in
this group.)
A56690
U V
A—Flange Nut (4 used)

B—Bracket
C—Accumulator
D—Ring
E—Cap Screw (8 used)
F—Plate
G—Screw (4 used)
H—Nut
I—Lock Washer
J—Washer
K—Screw (4 used)
L—Guard
M—Impeller
N—Shaft Key
O—Round Head Bolt (2 used)
P—Housing
Q—Motor
R—Washer (2 used)
S—Lock Nut (2 used)
T—Cap Screw (2 used)
U—Washer (2 used)
V—Lock Nut (2 used)
OUO6046,0001C42 –19–11AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=51
Vacuum Meter System
20
05
14

012606
PN=52
Section 25
Central Commodity System
Contents
Page
Group 05—Seed Tanks and Manifolds

Service Parts Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-1 25
Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-2
Remove and Install Seed Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-2
Remove and Install Refuge Plus Third Tank . . .25-05-6
Tank Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-9
Seal CCS Tanks To Prevent Water
Leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-9
Remove and Install Seed Agitator Motor
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-12
Remove and Install Seed Delivery
Manifold Seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-13
Remove and Install Seed Delivery
Manifold Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-22
Repair CCS Seed Tank Manifold (with Steel
End Plates) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-28
Repair CCS Seed Tank Manifold (with Plastic
End Plates) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-30
Remove and Install Seed Tank Lid Ring
and Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-31
Group 10—Seed Delivery Hose

Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-10-1
Remove and Install Seed Delivery Hose . . . . . .25-10-1
Repair Seed Delivery Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-10-2
Group 15—Central Commodity System Fan

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15-1
Remove and Install Central Commodity
System Blower Fan (S.N. —715100) . . . . . . .25-15-1
System Blower Fan (S.N. 715101—) . . . . . . .25-15-2
Repair Central Commodity System Blower
Fan Assembly (S.N. —715100) . . . . . . . . . . .25-15-4
Fan Assembly (S.N. 715101—) . . . . . . . . . . .25-15-7
Group 20—Polyethylene Tank Repair

Essential or Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . .25-20-1
Repair Polyethylene Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-20-4
Install RIVNUT Threaded Inserts . . . . . . . . . . .25-20-7

012606
PN=1
Contents
25

012606
PN=2
Group 05
Seed Tanks and Manifolds
Service Parts Kit
NOTE: Order tools according to information given in the

U.S. SERVICEGARD Catalog or from the
European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC). Some
tools may be available from a local supplier.
25
05
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company OUO1073,000198B –19–21JAN03–1/2 1
Tank Lid Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AA59327
Used to repair lid ring.
OUO1073,000198B –19–21JAN03–2/2
Other Material
Number Name Use
PM37463 (U.S.) Clear RTV Used to seal rivet heads.
OUO6046,0001C5D –19–16MAR04–1/1

012606
PN=55
Specifications
Tank Hold-Down Bracket Cap Screw Torque 10 N•m

(88.5 lb-in.)
Agitator Coupler Nut Torque 28 N•m

(250 lb-in.)
25 Agitator Shaft Pin Protrusion 20 mm

05 (0.787 in.)
2
Manifold Cap Screw Torque 10 N•m

(88.5 lb-in.)
End Plate-to-Manifold Cap Screws Torque 54 N•m

(Steel End Plates) (40 lb-ft)
End Plate-to-Manifold Cap Screws Torque 11.3 N•m

(Plastic End Plates) (100 lb-in.)
End Plate-to-Tank Cap Screw Torque 10 N•m

(88.5 lb-in.)
Nozzle Inlet-to-Outlet Retaining Torque 1.5 N•m

Screws (13 lb-in.)
OUO6046,0001BF2 –19–03AUG05–1/1
Remove and Install Seed Tanks
1. Lower planter to ground and place tractor in "PARK".

Shut off engine and remove key.
2. Empty seed from tank to be removed. (See operator’s

manual.)
3. If equipped with Refuge Plus, remove third tank. (See

procedure in this group.)
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CD9 –19–15JUL05–1/9

012606
PN=56
4. Disconnect agitator motor connector (A) and ground

wire (B).
5. Cut tie bands securing harness to manifold.
A—Agitator Motor Connector
–UN–09FEB04
B—Ground Wire
A53760
25
05
Agitator Motor 3
OUO6046,0001CD9 –19–15JUL05–2/9
6. Follow seed level sensor harness from tank and

disconnect connector (A), located in front of hydraulic
valve block.
A—Seed Level Sensor Connector
–UN–11DEC02
A51397
Seed Level Sensor Connector

012606
PN=57
7. Remove pins (A) and agitator connecting shaft (B).
8. If left-hand tank is to be removed, it is necessary to

remove agitator motor and mounting bracket. (See
REMOVE AND INSTALL SEED AGITATOR MOTOR
ASSEMBLY in this group.)
–UN–29AUG02
A—Pin (2 used)
B—Agitator Connector Shaft
A49982
25
05
4 Steel End Plate Shown
OUO6046,0001CD9 –19–15JUL05–4/9
9. If equipped with individual plenum hoses, mark and

identify plenum hoses (A). Remove by pulling straight
away from inlet (front) nozzles (B).
A—Hoses
B—Inlet Nozzles
–UN–18NOV04
A55375
OUO6046,0001CD9 –19–15JUL05–5/9
10. If equipped with single piece inlet plenum (B), remove

cap screws and nuts (A). Disconnect inlet plenum.
A—Cap Screw and Nut

B—Inlet Plenum
–UN–29JUN05
A56629

012606
PN=58
11. Loosen hose clamps.
12. Mark and identify seed delivery hoses (A); then pull,
while twisting, to remove from outlet (rear) nozzles
(B).
–UN–18NOV04
A—Seed Delivery Hose
B—Outlet Nozzle
A55174
25
05
OUO6046,0001CD9 –19–15JUL05–7/9 5
13. Remove cap screws (A) and tank hold-down brackets

(B).
A—Cap Screws
B—Hold-Down Bracket (4 per Tank)
–UN–29AUG02
A49984

012606
PN=59
14. Attach lifting sling to a 2 x 4 in. wood block (A) cut

longer than the ID of the tank lid opening.
CAUTION: Seed tank and manifold weigh

approximately 80 kg (176 lb).
–UN–28OCT02
IMPORTANT: Do NOT allow tank to hang on block for
extended periods of time or warpage to
lid can occur. Set tank on floor, with lid
facing up, after removal.
A50810
25
05
6 15. Lift seed tank from frame ensuring all wiring
harnesses are clear of tank and manifold; then set A—2 x 4 in. Wood Block
tank on floor.
16. Install seed tank in reverse order using the following

special instructions:
• Install tank hold-down brackets and tighten cap

screws to specification. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Specification
Tank Hold-Down Bracket Cap
Screw—Torque ............................................................................... 10 N•m
(88.5 lb-in.)
OUO6046,0001CD9 –19–15JUL05–9/9
Remove and Install Refuge Plus Third Tank

2. Empty seed from tank. (See operator’s manual.)
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001F20 –19–04AUG05–1/5

012606
PN=60
3. Disconnect agitator motor connector (A) and ground

wire (B).
4. Cut tie bands securing harness to manifold.
A—Agitator Motor Connector
–UN–09FEB04
B—Ground Wire
A53760
25
05
Agitator Motor 7
OUO1073,0001F20 –19–04AUG05–2/5

disconnect harness connector (A).
–UN–01JUL05
A56657

012606
PN=61
6. Remove cap screw and nut (A). Disconnect inlet

plenum (B) from seed tank manifold.
7. Mark and identify seed delivery hoses (C); then pull,

while twisting, to remove from outlet (rear) nozzles.
–UN–29JUN05
B—Inlet Plenum
C—Seed Delivery Hoses
A56613
25
05
8
–UN–29JUN05
A56612
OUO1073,0001F20 –19–04AUG05–4/5
8. Remove cap screws (A) and hold-down brackets (B)

from front and rear of seed tank.
CAUTION: Approximate of seed tank assembly

is 55 kg (121 lb).
–UN–29JUN05
9. Attach suitable lifting device to seed tank.
10. Lift seed tank from frame ensuring all wiring

harnesses and agitator motor are clear of mounting A56611
frame; then set tank on floor.
11. Install seed tank in reverse order using the following A—Cap Screw
special instructions: B—Hold-Down Bracket
• Install tank hold-down brackets and tighten cap

screws to specification. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Specification
Tank Hold-Down Bracket Cap
Screw—Torque ............................................................................... 10 N•m
(88.5 lb-in.)
OUO1073,0001F20 –19–04AUG05–5/5

012606
PN=62
Tank Repair
For information on plastic repair to polyethylene tanks,

see REPAIR POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC in Group 20 of
this section.
25
05
OUO6046,0001CDC –19–27OCT04–1/1 9
Seal CCS Tanks To Prevent Water Leakage
NOTE: Additional sealing of CCS tanks is not needed

under most circumstances. If water leakage
becomes a problem, tanks may be sealed using
silicone sealant as shown.
1. Empty tank. (See operator’s manual.)
OUO1073,0001F32 –19–04AUG05–1/4
2. Tighten manifold to tank cap screws to specification.
Specification
Manifold Cap Screw—Torque ........................................................ 10 N•m
(88.5 lb-in.)
3. Remove any dust from area around each RIVNUT

(A).
4. On the inside of tanks, apply PM37463 Silicone Sealer

on every RIVNUT.
–UN–29JUN05
5. Apply silicone sealer around every spanner
brace-to-manifold joint (B), if not welded.
A56433
A—RIVNUT
B—Spanner Brace-To-Manifold Joint
RIVNUT is a trademark of RIVNUT Engineered Products Inc. Continued on next page OUO1073,0001F32 –19–04AUG05–2/4

012606
PN=63
6. Apply silicone sealer along entire tank-to-manifold

seam (A). It may be necessary to apply sealer along
tank-to-support bar (B) area where manifold seam has
restricted access.
A—Tank-To-Manifold Seam
B—Tank-To-Support Bar Seam
–UN–29JUN05
25
05
10
A56435

012606
PN=64
NOTE: Steps 7 and 8 are for machines with individual

plenum hoses.
7. Remove air supply hoses from frame plenum. Liberally

apply a bead of PM37463 Silicone Sealer (A)
completely around inner edge of air supply hose.
8. Reattach hoses with end of coil (B) facing down.
A—Silicone Sealer
–UN–14OCT03
B—End Of Coil 25
05
11
A52925
–UN–14OCT03
A52892
–UN–14OCT03
A52893
OUO1073,0001F32 –19–04AUG05–4/4

012606
PN=65
Remove and Install Seed Agitator Motor

Assembly
1. Remove cap screws (A) and cover.
2. Disconnect connector (C) and ground wire (B).
–UN–04FEB04
A—Cap Screw (2 used)
B—Ground Wire
C—Connector
A53769
25
05
12 OUO6046,0001CDA –19–15JUL05–1/5
3. Remove pin (A).
A—Pin
–UN–11SEP02
A50199
Manifold with Steel End Plate Shown
OUO6046,0001CDA –19–15JUL05–2/5
4. Remove cap screws (A) and agitator motor assembly.

–UN–04FEB04
A53772
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CDA –19–15JUL05–3/5

012606
PN=66
IMPORTANT: Coupler (B) must be timed for proper

operation. Mark coupler before
removing and transfer to new part if
necessary.
5. Remove nut (A) and coupler (B). Reinstall coupler (B)
–UN–11SEP02
onto new agitator motor assembly.
6. Install agitator motor assembly in reverse order using

the following special instructions:
A50201
25
• Tighten nut (A) to specification. 05
13
Specification A—Nut
Agitator Coupler Nut—Torque ........................................................ 28 N•m B—Coupler
(250 lb-in.)
OUO6046,0001CDA –19–15JUL05–4/5
IMPORTANT: With motor in parked position, pin (A)

should be at approximately a 39 degree
angle from horizontal. If pin is not in
proper position, drive coupler must be
removed and repositioned or damage to
–UN–11SEP02
agitator motor and drive assembly
could result.
• Ensure correct timing of agitator drive.

• Check to ensure that “wipe” angle of pin (A) is
A50199
symmetrical with pins on agitator shaft inside of tank.
• Lower planter to actuate motor; then check for free Manifold with Steel End Plate Shown
rotation of agitator shaft.
A—Pin
OUO6046,0001CDA –19–15JUL05–5/5
Remove and Install Seed Delivery Manifold

Seal
NOTE: Manifold seal replacement is shown for main seed

tanks. Procedure for replacing Refuge Plus tank
seal similar.
1. Lower planter to ground, place tractor in “PARK”. Shut

off engine and remove key.
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–1/21

012606
PN=67
2. Empty all seed from tank. (See operator’s manual.)
3. Loosen hose clamps.

while twisting, to remove from outlet (rear) nozzles (B).
–UN–18NOV04
B—Outlet Nozzle
A55174
25
05
14 OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–2/21
5. If equipped with individual plenum hoses, mark and

identify plenum hoses (A). Remove by pulling straight
A—Plenum Hose
B—Inlet Nozzle
–UN–15NOV02
A50290
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–3/21

7. Remove seed agitator motor. (See REMOVE AND

INSTALL SEED AGITATOR MOTOR in this group.)
–UN–29JUN05

B—Inlet Plenum
A56629

012606
PN=68
8. Remove pin (A); then slide agitator connecting shaft

(B) away from manifold.
9. Remove cap screw (C) from each end plate.
A—Pin
–UN–13SEP02
B—Agitator Connecting Shaft
C—Cap Screw
A50254
25
05
Steel End Plate Shown 15
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–5/21

disconnect connector (A).
–UN–11DEC02
A51397
Seed Level Sensor Connector

012606
PN=69
11. Remove cap screws (A) and brackets (B) from inlet
and outlet side of manifold.
12. Remove manifold from tank.
13. Remove nozzles at this time if nozzle-to-manifold seal
–UN–29AUG02
needs replaced. (See REMOVE AND INSTALL SEED
DELIVERY MANIFOLD NOZZLES in this group.)
A49984
25 B—Hold-Down Bracket (4 per Tank)
05
16
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–7/21
IMPORTANT: Note location of each door prior to

removal. Door geometry will vary to
allow latches to be centered between
nozzles.
14. Remove cap (A) using a screwdriver.
–UN–27AUG03
15. Remove pin (B) and cleanout door.
A—Cap
A52656
B—Pin
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–8/21
NOTE: Steps 16—19 are for manifolds with steel end

plates.
16. Loosen set screw (A); turn eccentric collar (B)

counterclockwise to remove.
–UN–13SEP02
A—Set Screw
B—Eccentric Collar (Right-Hand Side Only)
A50269

012606
PN=70
NOTE: Left-hand side end plate shown, right-hand side

identical.
17. Remove bearing flangettes and bearing (A).
18. Remove cap screws (B) and end plate (C).
–UN–13SEP02
19. Remove agitator shaft.
A—Bearing Flangettes and Bearing
A50270
B—Cap Screw 25
C—End Plate 05
17
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–10/21
NOTE: Steps 20—22 are for manifolds with plastic end

plates.
20. Remove pin (A) and washers (B) from each end of
manifold.
–UN–29JUN05
A—Pin
B—Washer (2 used)
A56632
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–11/21
21. Remove nuts (A) and end plate (B) from each end of
manifold.
22. Remove agitator shaft.
A—Nut (4 used)
–UN–29JUN05
B—End Plate
A56633

012606
PN=71
IMPORTANT: All pins (A) must have 20 mm

protrusion located on same side of
agitator shaft.
23. Inspect and replace parts as necessary, making sure

pins (A) are at specification.
–UN–05NOV02
Specification
Agitator Shaft Pin—Protrusion ........................................................ 20 mm
(0.787 in.)
A50285
25
05 24. Remove seal from manifold and end plates.
18
A—Pin
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–13/21
IMPORTANT: Manifold-to-tank seals must not be

reused if removed. Seal must be
replaced or air and water leakage and
improper seed delivery may occur.
Nozzle-to-manifold seals may be reused
if not torn or damaged.
IMPORTANT: Install round head bolts (if removed) in

end plates prior to installing new seals.
–UN–05NOV02
25. Install new seal (A) by removing paper backing (B)
and aligning holes in seal with holes in manifold (C)
and end plate (D).
A50272
26. Press or roll seal firmly to ensure good adhesion.
A—Seal
B—Paper Backing
C—Manifold
D—End Plate (2 used)
–UN–05NOV02
A50273

012606
PN=72
NOTE: Steps 27 and 28 are for manifolds with steel end

plates.
27. Install bearing flangettes (A), bearing (B) and nuts.
A—Flangette (2 used)
–UN–16SEP02
B—Bearing
A50275
25
05
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–15/21 19
NOTE: Do not tighten end plate-to-manifold cap screws at

this time.
28. Install end plate (A), using cap screws, spacers (B)
and nuts.
–UN–16SEP02
A—End Plate
B—Spacer
A50276
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–16/21
NOTE: Steps 29 and 30 are for manifolds with plastic end

plates.
29. Install end plate (B) and nuts (A) on each end of
manifold.
–UN–29JUN05
A—Nut (4 used)
B—End Plate
A56633
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–17/21
30. Install washers (B) and pin (A) on each end of

manifold.
A—Pin
B—Washer (2 used)
–UN–29JUN05
A56632

012606
PN=73
31. Install agitator shaft (A).
32. Install nozzles, if removed, at this time. (See

REMOVE AND INSTALL SEED DELIVERY
MANIFOLD NOZZLES in this group.)
–UN–16SEP02
A—Agitator Shaft
A50277
25
05
20 Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–19/21

012606
PN=74
NOTE: Install adhesive side of corner seal (A) to end

plate seal.
33. Install corner seal (A).
34. Install manifold to tank in reverse order using the
–UN–16SEP02
following instructions:
• Install straps around seed tank and attach to seed

tank cradle.
• Tighten manifold cap screws to specification:
A50279
25
05
Specification 21
Manifold Cap Screw—Torque ........................................................ 10 N•m A—Corner Seal (4 used)
(88.5 lb-in.)
• Tighten end plate-to-manifold cap screws to

specification.
Specification
End Plate-to-Manifold Cap
Screws (Steel End Plates)—
Torque ............................................................................................ 54 N•m
(40 lb-ft)
End Plate-to-Manifold Cap
Screws (Plastic End Plates)—
Torque ......................................................................................... 11.3 N•m
(100 lb-in.)
• Tighten end plate-to-tank cap screws to

specification.
Specification
End Plate-to-Tank Cap Screw—
Torque ............................................................................................ 10 N•m
(88.5 lb-in.)
35. Check agitator shaft position for proper pin placement

as follows:
• Pins should be centered between nozzles on all

machines. Two center pins should be positioned
equal distance on both sides of bin level sensor
bracket.

012606
PN=75
• For manifolds with steel end plates: Be certain that

all cap screws are tightened to specification on end
plate (A) and shaft is properly positioned; then
install eccentric collar (C) to shaft (B) and tighten in
clockwise direction. Tighten set screw.
A—End Plate
B—Agitator Shaft
C—Eccentric Collar
–UN–16SEP02
25
05
22
A50278
Steel End Plate
OUO6046,0001CDD –19–04AUG05–21/21
Remove and Install Seed Delivery Manifold

Nozzle

2. Empty seed from tank to be removed. (See machine

operator’s manual.)
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–1/13

while twisting, to remove from outlet (rear) nozzles (B).
A—Delivery Hose
B—Outlet Nozzle
–UN–27AUG03
A52570
Continued on next page OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–2/13

012606
PN=76
4. If equipped with individual plenum hoses (A), mark and

identify plenum hoses. Remove by pulling straight
A—Plenum Hose
B—Inlet Nozzle
–UN–15NOV02
25
05
23
A50290
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–3/13


B—Inlet Plenum
–UN–29JUN05
A56629
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–4/13
6. Open cleanout doors (A).
A—Cleanout Door
–UN–27AUG03
A52675

012606
PN=77
7. Remove nozzle inlet-to-outlet retaining screws (A).
A—Nozzle Inlet-to-Outlet Retaining Screw (2 used per

nozzle set)
–UN–05NOV02
A50266
25
05
24 OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–6/13
8. Remove nozzles from manifold, pulling down on inlet

nozzle to separate from outlet nozzle.
9. Inspect nozzle-to-manifold seal for wear or damage.

Replace as necessary. (See REMOVE AND INSTALL
SEED DELIVERY MANIFOLD in this section.)
–UN–27AUG03
A52678
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–7/13
NOTE: New screws should be installed anytime nozzles

are removed.
10. Install inlet and outlet nozzles (A) into manifold.
11. Using clamp (B), compress manifold-to-nozzle seals

and gently press nozzles into position and snap
together.
A—Nozzle
B—Clamp –UN–20SEP02
A50347

012606
PN=78
12. Install new nozzle inlet-to-outlet retaining screws (A);

then tighten to specification.
Specification
Nozzle Inlet-to-Outlet Retaining
Screws—Torque ............................................................................ 1.5 N•m
(13 lb-in.)
–UN–05NOV02
A—Nozzle Inlet-to-Outlet Retaining Screw (2 used per
nozzle set)
A50266
25
05
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–9/13 25
13. Close cleanout doors (A).
A—Cleanout Door
–UN–27AUG03
A52675
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–10/13
14. If equipped with individual plenum hoses (A), install

plenum hoses to inlet nozzles (B).
A—Plenum Hose
B—Inlet Nozzle
–UN–15NOV02
A50290

012606
PN=79
15. If equipped with single piece inlet plenum (B), connect

plenum and install cap screws and nuts (A).

B—Inlet Plenum
–UN–29JUN05
A56629
25
05
26 OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–12/13
16. Install seed delivery hoses (A) to outlet nozzles (B).

B—Outlet Nozzle
–UN–27AUG03
A52570
OUO6089,00004A5 –19–11AUG05–13/13

012606
PN=80
25
05
27

012606
PN=81
Repair CCS Seed Tank Manifold (with Steel End Plates)
12
11
2 8
9 10
25
05 6
28
5 7
13
14
3
1 16
15
4
5
31
8
32
7
17
18
30
6
19
9
20
21
10
11
22
28
27
23
14 26
25 24
13
29
–UN–18SEP03
A52871
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CDB –19–04AUG05–1/2

012606
PN=82
1—Seal 9—Nut 18—Hold-Down Bracket (2 per 25—Pin

2—Nozzle 10—Cap Screw (2 used) side) 26—Washer
3—Cap Screws (2 per 11—Bearing 19—Cap Screw (8 used) 27—Pin
assembled nozzle) 12—Locking Collar 20—Insert, Clean-Out Door 28—Pin
4—Cap Screw (8 used) 13—Nut (6 used) 21—Nut 29—Shaft
5—Spacer (8 used) 14—Bearing Flange 22—Clean-Out Door 30—Seal
6—Seal (2 used) 15—Cap Screw (16 used) 23—Latch 31—Grommet
7—Round Head Bolt (6 used) 16—Seal 24—Cap Screw 32—Corner Seal
8—End Plate 17—Nozzle
25
05
OUO6046,0001CDB –19–04AUG05–2/2 29

012606
PN=83
Repair CCS Seed Tank Manifold (with Plastic End Plates)
9
2 6
7 8
5
10
25 3
05
30 1 4
16
17
15
6
13
18
9 7
11 14 19
8
5 20
21
22
12
23
10
24
–UN–15AUG05
28
27 26 25
28
A56656
1—Seal 8—Cap Screw (2 used) 15—Grommet 22—Nut

2—Nozzle 9—Pin (2 used) 16—Seal 23—Clean-Out Door
3—Cap Screws (2 per 10—Washers (4 used) 17—Cap Screw 24—Latch
assembled nozzle) 11—Pin 18—Nozzle 25—Cap Screw
4—Cap Screw (8 used) 12—Agitator Shaft 19—Hold-Down Bracket 26—Pin
5—Seal 13—Corner Seal (4 used) 20—Cap Screw (2 per Bracket) 27—Spring
6—End Plate 14—Seal 21—Insert, Clean-Out Door 28—Retainer Cap
7—Nut (8 used)
OUO1073,0001F29 –19–04AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=84
Remove and Install Seed Tank Lid Ring and

Seal
NOTE: The following procedure is performed using

sealant, rivets, and washers that are included in
AA59327 Tank Lid Repair Kit.
–UN–17JAN03
NOTE: Procedure is shown with seed tank removed from
planter, repair can be done with tank installed.
A51584
1. Remove tank lid (A). 25
05
31
2. Untie rope (B) and lay tank lid aside.
A—Lid
B—Rope
–UN–17JAN03
A51583
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001985 –19–15JAN03–1/8

012606
PN=85
IMPORTANT: If new ring is to be installed, note

location of starting threads on ring and
install new ring with the same thread
orientation.
IMPORTANT: If reusing existing ring, place a paint

mark on ring and tank to mark location
–UN–17JAN03
of ring.
IMPORTANT: Hold back side of rivet so rivet does not
A51577
25 spin. If rivet spins, hole in tank may
05 become enlarged or damaged.
32
3. Using a 4.5 mm drill bit and holding back side of rivet, A—Rivet (20 used)
drill off head of rivets (A) and remove lid ring (B). B—Lid Ring
4. Scrape off any old sealant on tank mating surface.
CAUTION: If necessary for a second person to

enter tank, it must be cleaned thoroughly with
soap and water to remove any contaminants.
NOTE: Tank lid ring can be a tight fit. It may be

necessary to heat tank using a heat gun and have
an additional person inside the tank to push up on
the tank to slightly expand opening in tank.
5. Inspect holes in tank for wear or damage. If holes are

damaged or are larger than 5 mm, reinstall and rotate
lid ring and drill new holes in tank so that new holes
are centered between existing holes.

012606
PN=86
NOTE: Steps 6—10 are for installing a new lid ring. If

reusing existing ring skip to step 11.
NOTE: A total of 20 holes must be drilled in new ring.

Only drill 10 pre-marked locations at this time.
6. Drill out hole locations (A) marked in new ring with a 5
–UN–17JAN03
mm drill bit.
CAUTION: If necessary for a second person to
A51578
25
enter tank, it must be cleaned thoroughly with 05
soap and water to remove any contaminants. 33
A—Drill Location
NOTE: Tank lid ring can be a tight fit. It may be
necessary to heat tank using a heat gun and have
an additional person inside the tank to push up on
the tank to slightly expand opening in tank.
7. Install lid ring onto tank.
8. Line up holes in tank with holes drilled in lid ring in

step 6.
9. Using a paint marker, mark location of remaining holes

to be drilled in lid ring by marking through holes in
tank.
10. Remove lid ring, drill and countersink remaining holes

in lid ring.

012606
PN=87
IMPORTANT: Strip sealant must be centered over

holes in tank.
11. Clean tank mating surface and apply strip sealant (A)
around entire length of mating surface.
12. Install lid ring into tank.
–UN–17JAN03
NOTE: Lid ring will be easier to turn and line up holes if
not pressed fully into tank. Once holes have been
A51580
25 lined up, press lid ring down flush onto tank
05 mating surface.
34
13. Align holes. A—Sealant
a. If reusing existing lid, line up holes in tank by lining

up paint marks that were made on tank and lid
ring.
b. If installing new lid, align holes and ensure starting

threads of new ring are in the correct position.

012606
PN=88
IMPORTANT: Rivet should be flush with tank lid ring

when installed.
A
14. With lid ring (A) and sealant (B) in place, install rivets
(D) while holding washers (C) on back side of tank.
C
B
A—Lid Ring
D
B—Sealant
C—Washer
D—Rivet
25
05
35
–UN–16JAN03
A51579
–UN–17JAN03
A51581
OUO1073,0001985 –19–15JAN03–5/8
15. Inspect rivets (A) for correct installation, rivet should

be flush with tank lid ring.
A—Rivet (20 used)

–UN–17JAN03
A51585

012606
PN=89
IMPORTANT: Ensure sealant is applied down into

hole of rivet head. If sealant does not
penetrate into hole of rivet head,
sealant may flake away and moisture
may enter rivet head.
16. Apply PM37463 Clear RTV to top of each rivet head.
–UN–17JAN03
This will seal the rivet head and prevent moisture
from entering.
A51586
25
05
36 OUO1073,0001985 –19–15JAN03–7/8
17. Install rope (B) through hole in tank and tie a double
knot.
18. Install opposite end of rope through P-clamp on tank

lid and tie a double knot.
19. Install and tighten lid (A).
–UN–17JAN03
A—Lid
B—Rope
A51584
–UN–17JAN03
A51583
OUO1073,0001985 –19–15JAN03–8/8

012606
PN=90
Group 10
Seed Delivery Hose
Other Material
Number Name Use
AR54749 (U.S.) Lubricating Soap Used to lubricate inside of seed

delivery hose and connector end.
25
10
OUO6089,0000323 –19–04AUG05–1/1 1
Remove and Install Seed Delivery Hose
1. With tank emptied of all seed, loosen hose clamp.
2. Pull seed delivery hose (A) from nozzle (B).
–UN–18NOV04
B—Outlet Nozzle
A55174
OUO6046,0001CDF –19–04AUG05–1/2
3. Twist coupling (A) counterclockwise and pull to

disconnect hose from hopper.
4. Repair and replace delivery hose as necessary. (See

REPAIR SEED DELIVERY HOSE in this group.)
–UN–27NOV02
5. Inspect and replace O-ring as necessary.
6. Install in reverse order.
A51299
A—Coupling
OUO6046,0001CDF –19–04AUG05–2/2

012606
PN=91
Seed Delivery Hose
Repair Seed Delivery Hose
NOTE: Only cut enough seed delivery hose to remove

connector.
1. Cut seed hose at connector.
2. Remove broken connector or cracked seed hose.
25
10
2 OUO6089,0000246 –19–04AUG05–1/4
3. Apply AR54749 Lubricating Soap to connector barb

end (A) and inside seed delivery hose (B).
A—Connector Barb End

B—Seed Delivery Hose
–UN–18JUN02
A49433
OUO6089,0000246 –19–04AUG05–2/4
4. Push connector (A) into seed delivery hose (B).
A—Connector
B—Seed Delivery Hose
–UN–03APR02
A49009
OUO6089,0000246 –19–04AUG05–3/4
5. Install O-ring (A) into connector (B).
A—O-Ring
B—Connector
–UN–03APR02
A49007
OUO6089,0000246 –19–04AUG05–4/4

012606
PN=92
Group 15
Central Commodity System Fan
Specifications
Blower Fan Assembly (S.N. —

715100)
Impeller Tapered Hub Cap Screws Torque 13.6 N•m

(120 lb-in.)
25
Blower Fan Assembly (S.N. 15
1
715101—)
Blower Fan Assembly Housing Torque 6 N•m

Cap Screws (53 lb-in.)
Motor Mounting Nuts Torque 41 N•m

(30 lb-ft)
Impeller Nut Torque 41 N•m

(30 lb-ft)
Threaded Plug Torque 41 N•m

(30 lb-ft)
Air Inlet Shield Cap Screws Torque 12 N•m

(106 lb-in.)
Oil Cooler Cap Screws Torque 12 N•m

(106 lb-in.)
OUO1073,0001F24 –19–30JUN05–1/1

System Blower Fan (S.N. —715100)
1. Remove cap screws (A) and position hydraulic oil

cooler aside.
–UN–04FEB04

A53776
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001C08 –19–30JUN05–1/2

012606
PN=93
2. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A and B).
3. Disconnect connector (C).
4. Remove nuts (D).
5. Remove blower assembly.
–UN–04FEB04
6. Repair or replace as necessary. (See REPAIR
CENTRAL COMMODITY SYSTEM BLOWER FAN
A53777
25 ASSEMBLY in this group.)
15
2
A—Hydraulic Hose
B—Hydraulic Hose (2 used)
C—Connector
D—Nut (2 used)
OUO6046,0001C08 –19–30JUN05–2/2

System Blower Fan (S.N. 715101—)
NOTE: Fan assembly does not have to be removed in

order to replace fan motor or oil cooler. (See
REPAIR CENTRAL COMMODITY SYSTEM
BLOWER FAN ASSEMBLY [S.N. 715101—] in
this group.)
NOTE: Fan will have one of two different mounting styles.

Fan may either be bolted directly to the CCS
frame or bolted to a mounting bracket that
attaches to the main frame tube.
2. Shut off engine and remove key.
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001F61 –19–22JUL05–1/5

012606
PN=94
Fan Attached to CCS Frame
1. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A) from oil cooler (B) and

fan motor (C).
2. Disconnect fan motor solenoid harness connector.
–UN–22JUL05
CAUTION: Approximate weight of fan assembly
is 35 kg (77 lb).
A56847
25
IMPORTANT: Be certain not to damage fins on oil 15
cooler when removing blower assembly. 3
Bent fins do not allow proper cooling of A—Hydraulic Hose (4 used)
hydraulic system. B—Oil Cooler
C—Fan Motor
3. Support fan assembly (E). Remove cap screws and D—Cap Screw and Nut (10 used)
nuts (D) and fan assembly. E—Fan Assembly
OUO1073,0001F61 –19–22JUL05–2/5
Fan Attached to Mounting Bracket
1. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A) from oil cooler (B).
A—Hydraulic Hoses
B—Oil Cooler
–UN–01JUL05
A56659
OUO1073,0001F61 –19–22JUL05–3/5
2. Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A) from fan motor (C).
3. Cap and plug all hydraulic fittings.
4. Disconnect electrical connector (B).

–UN–01JUL05
A—Hydraulic Hose (3 used)

B—Electrical Connector
C—Fan Motor
A56660
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001F61 –19–22JUL05–4/5

012606
PN=95
5. Remove hose clamps (A) and air duct (B).
CAUTION: Approximate weight of fan assembly

and mounting bracket is 47 kg (104 lb).
IMPORTANT: Be certain not to damage fins on oil

cooler when removing blower assembly.
Bent fins do not allow proper cooling of
hydraulic system.
25
15 6. Remove cap screws (C) and blower assembly (D).
4
–UN–01JUL05
A—Hose Clamps
B—Air Duct
A56661
C—Cap Screws
D—Blower Assembly
OUO1073,0001F61 –19–22JUL05–5/5

Fan Assembly (S.N. —715100)
1. Remove central commodity system blower fan. (See

REMOVE AND INSTALL CENTRAL COMMODITY
SYSTEM BLOWER FAN in this group.)
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001B84 –19–15JUL05–1/5

012606
PN=96
2. Remove six nuts (A) and cap screws; then separate

housing.
A—Nut (6 used)
–UN–26NOV03
25
15
5
A53395
OUO6046,0001B84 –19–15JUL05–2/5
3. Remove two cap screws (A) and install in jack screw

holes (B) of hub.
IMPORTANT: Be certain not to drop impeller. Damage

to impeller can impede balance and
performance.
–UN–25JUL02
4. Tighten cap screws (A) evenly and incrementally to
push tapered hub from impeller.
A49632
5. Remove impeller and inspect for broken fins, cracks or
other defects. Replace as necessary.
6. Clean impeller and inside of housing. A—Cap Screw (2 used)

B—Jack Screw Hole (2 used)
OUO6046,0001B84 –19–15JUL05–3/5
7. Clean dirt and debris from grooves (A) in tapered hub.
A—Groove
–UN–24JUL02
A49633
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001B84 –19–15JUL05–4/5

012606
PN=97
8. Remove nuts, bracket, socket head screws (A) and

motor.
9. Inspect motor shaft. Remove any defects using an

emery cloth.
–UN–26NOV03
10. Repair or replace motor as necessary. (See REPAIR
CENTRAL COMMODITY SYSTEM BLOWER
MOTOR in Section 70, Group 05.)
A53399
25 11. Install motor, bracket, socket head screws and nuts.
15
6
12. With fan housing lying flat on bench, place 2 mm
shim stock between fan impeller and housing 180° A—Socket Head Screw (2 used)
apart from each other towards outer edge of impeller.
13. Install key and tapered hub.
14. Install two cap screws in unthreaded holes of hub by

hand.
15. Lightly tap tapered hub with hammer to seat hub.
IMPORTANT: Cap screws are not properly torqued

until BOTH cap screws have attained
the proper torque. Until properly
tightened, one screw will loosen the
other while tightening.
16. Tighten cap screws by alternating from one to the

other until both cap screws attain torque specified.
Specification
Impeller Tapered Hub Cap
Screws—Torque .......................................................................... 13.6 N•m
(120 lb-in.)
17. Remove shims stock from between impeller and

housing.
18. Install housing and retain using cap screws and nuts.
19. Rotate fan impeller and check free rotation. Fan

should not contact housing at any point.
OUO6046,0001B84 –19–15JUL05–5/5

012606
PN=98

Fan Assembly (S.N. 715101—)
1. Remove central commodity system blower fan. (See

REMOVE AND INSTALL CENTRAL COMMODITY
SYSTEM BLOWER FAN in this group.)
25
15
OUO1073,0001F23 –19–11AUG05–1/7 7
2. Remove cap screws and nuts (A) and blower fan

assembly mount (B), if equipped.
A—Cap Screw and Nut (10 used)

B—Blower Fan Assembly Mount
–UN–01JUL05
A56663
OUO1073,0001F23 –19–11AUG05–2/7
3. Remove cap screws (A) and oil cooler assembly (B).
4. Remove cap screws (C) and air inlet shield (D).

B—Oil Cooler
–UN–01JUL05
C—Cap Screw (2 used)
D—Air Inlet Shield
A56664
–UN–01JUL05
A56665

012606
PN=99
5. Remove threaded plug (A).
6. Remove impeller nut (B).
7. Install threaded plug (A) and tighten against end of

motor shaft until impeller is free of shaft.
–UN–01JUL05
A—Threaded Plug
B—Impeller Nut
A56671
25
15
8
–UN–01JUL05
A56672
OUO1073,0001F23 –19–11AUG05–4/7
8. Place a reference mark between the motor (B)

mounting flange and outside of motor fan housing.
9. Remove nuts (A) and blower fan assembly motor (B).
A—Nuts
–UN–01JUL05
B—Motor
A56666

012606
PN=100
10. Remove housing cap screws (A).
11. Separate blower fan assembly housing (B) and

remove impeller (C).
12. Assemble blower fan assembly in reverse order using

the following special instructions:
–UN–01JUL05
• Tighten housing cap screws to specification.
A56673
Specification 25
Blower Fan Assembly Housing 15
Cap Screws—Torque ....................................................................... 6 N•m 9
(53 lb-in.)
B—Housing
C—Impeller
• Install fan motor and align reference marks made

during removal. Install and tighten motor mounting
nuts to specification.
Specification
Motor Mounting Nuts—Torque ....................................................... 41 N•m
(30 lb-ft)
• Tighten impeller nut to specification.
Specification
Impeller Nut—Torque ..................................................................... 41 N•m
(30 lb-ft)
• Tighten threaded plug to specification.
Specification
Threaded Plug—Torque ................................................................. 41 N•m
(30 lb-ft)
• Tighten air inlet shield and oil cooler mounting cap

screws to specification.
Specification
Air Inlet Shield Cap Screws—
Torque ............................................................................................ 12 N•m
(106 lb-in.)

012606
PN=101
Specification
Oil Cooler Cap Screws—Torque .................................................... 12 N•m
(106 lb-in.)
OUO1073,0001F23 –19–11AUG05–7/7
25
15
10

012606
PN=102
Group 20
Polyethylene Tank Repair
NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICEGARD or

European Microfiche Tool Catalogs.
ESSENTIAL TOOLS listed are required to perform the job

correctly and are obtainable only from SERVICEGARD or
European Microfiche Tool Catalogs.
RECOMMENDED TOOLS, as noted, are suggested to

perform the job correctly. Some tools may be available 25
from local suppliers or may be fabricated. 20
1
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–1/8
JT073371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic Welding Kit
Used to repair polyethylene material.
–UN–29OCT02
A50706
1
Recommended tool.
OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–2/8
Plastic Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07337-21, 2
Used to repair polyethylene material.
1
Recommended tool.
2
Included in JT07337 Plastic Welding Kit.
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–3/8

012606
PN=103
Brass Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07337-141, 2
Used to clean head of JT07337-2 Plastic Welder.
1
Recommended tool.
25 2
20
2 OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–4/8
Pin Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDST30-41, 2
Used to clean weld wire feed tube on head of JT07337-2

Plastic Welder.
1
Recommended tool.
2
OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–5/8
Aluminum Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT07337-151, 2
Used as backing to hold plastic weld.
1
Recommended tool.
2
Included in JT07337 Plastic Welding Kit and is available as a
replacement a part.
OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–6/8
Heat Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JT073751, 2
Used to soften polyethylene for repair.

–UN–29OCT02
1
Recommended tool.
A50707
2
Available as an optional tool in JT07337 Plastic Welding Kit.
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–7/8

012606
PN=104
RIVNUT Installation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG1295
Used to install RIVNUT threaded inserts.
–UN–04JUN01
H68325
25
20
OUO1073,0001880 –19–05AUG05–8/8 3

012606
PN=105
Repair Polyethylene Plastic

A
The following procedure is performed using tools that are
B
included in JT07337 Plastic Welding Kit.
For additional information on identifying and repairing

plastics, refer to Fundamentals of Service (FOS) manual
–UN–29OCT02
on Plastics Repair.
CAUTION: Do NOT attempt to repair fuel tanks,
A50721
25
20 fuel lines, battery cases, or any other item when
4 the failure of the repair could cause a hazard.
IMPORTANT: Damaged area must be completely

clean and dry prior to repair.
NOTE: If the area to be repaired has been waxed or has

oil stains, use a commercial wax and grease
remover after washing. Wax and oil will not allow
–UN–23OCT02
proper adhesion of material.
1. Prepare the surface: Clean damaged area using

warm water and a mild detergent. It may be necessary
A50709
to clean out crack using a file or grinder.
2. Sand surface using a fine grit (220 or 320) sandpaper.

A—Single V-Groove for Thin Material
B—Double V-Groove for Thick Material
C—JT07337-2 Plastic Welder1
CAUTION: Melted plastic can produce toxic
fumes. Protect eyes, nose, mouth and exposed
skin.
Melted plastic can stick to skin and cause

severe burns. Do not touch plastic with bare
hands.
3. For small cracks in thin material: Using the edge of

JT07337-2 Plastic Welder1 (C) or a grinder, make a
single V-groove (A) in the crack that is approximately
75% of total material thickness.
For small cracks in thick material: Use the method

above, but make a double V-groove (B) to 50% of total
material thickness.
1
Continued on next page OUO6037,000169A –19–15OCT02–1/7

012606
PN=106
4. Insert 1/8 in. diameter Polyethylene Welding Wire1 (A)

of suitable color into melt tube (B) of preheated
JT07337-2 Plastic Welder.
IMPORTANT: Keep iron moving and do not allow to

burn or discolor plastic.
–UN–23OCT02
5. Pull welder slowly towards you, feeding the wire into
the melt tube; then remove weld wire from melt tube,
lower the handle and push the welder on its heel to
A50724
force the weld wire into base material. Work in one 25
inch increments to help smooth out seam while plastic 20
Pull Weld Wire into Groove 5
is still malleable.
A—1/8 in. Dia. Polyethylene Welding Wire

B—Melt Tube
–UN–23OCT02
A50728
1
JT07337-8 Black, JT07337-6 White, JT07337-12 Green and
JT07337-10 Yellow are included in JT07337 Plastic Welding Kit and are
available as replacement parts. Push Melted Wire into Base Material
OUO6037,000169A –19–15OCT02–2/7
6. It may be necessary to periodically remove extra

plastic from head of iron using JT07337-14 Brass
Brush (A).1
A—JT07337-14 Brass Brush
–UN–23OCT02
A50727
1
OUO6037,000169A –19–15OCT02–3/7
7. After plastic is welded into damaged area, clean melt

tube of JT07337-2 Plastic Welder (A) using JDST30-4
Pin Punch1 (A).
A—JT07237-2 Plastic Welder

B—JDST30-4 Pin Punch
–UN–23OCT02
A50725
1

012606
PN=107
IMPORTANT: Be certain that the scrap being used is

comprised of the same type of material
as the repair piece.
1. For small/medium holes: Trim a piece of scrap

material 6—10 mm (0.236—0.394 in.) wide.
–UN–23OCT02
2. Install JT07337-15 Aluminum Tape1 (A) to opposite
side for temporary backing.
A50682
25
A—JT07337-15 Aluminum Tape
20
6 Poly Scrap
–UN–23OCT02
A50683
1
Included in JT07337 Plastic Welding Kit and is available as a
replacement a part.
OUO6037,000169A –19–15OCT02–5/7
3. Soften end of plastic scrap using JT07375 Heat

Gun1until it will adhere to base material; then slowly
rotate plastic into hole while directing heat to scrap
filler. Do not overheat.
A—JT07375 Heat Gun

B—Scrap
–UN–23OCT02
A50679
1

012606
PN=108
4. Once hole is completely filled, smooth surface by

heating the end of a putty knife (A) using JT07375
Heat Gun1 (B). Apply slight pressure and work plastic
in several directions to be certain all air bubbles are
removed.
–UN–23OCT02
5. Allow to completely cool; then remove aluminum tape.
A—Putty Knife
B—JT07375 Heat Gun
A50726
25
20
7
1
OUO6037,000169A –19–15OCT02–7/7
Install RIVNUT Threaded Inserts
1. Lubricate threads (A) of JDG1295 RIVNUT Installation

Tool using a light oil.
A—Threads
–UN–05NOV02
A50743
RIVNUT is a trademark of RIVNUT Engineered Products Inc. OUO1073,000187F –19–23OCT02–1/5
2. Screw head end of RIVNUT (A) onto pull-up stud (B) of

JDG1295 RIVNUT Installation Tool, until all threads of
RIVNUT are engaged with stud.
A—RIVNUT Head
B—Pull-Up Stud
–UN–18FEB99
H54038
Continued on next page OUO1073,000187F –19–23OCT02–2/5

012606
PN=109
3. Rotate anvil (A) until tight against head (B) of RIVNUT

(C).
A—Anvil
B—Head
C—RIVNUT
–UN–23OCT02
A50744
25
20
8 OUO1073,000187F –19–23OCT02–3/5
4. Position RIVNUT and JDG1295 RIVNUT Installation

Tool (A) in hole with head of RIVNUT tight to tank.
A—JDG1295 RIVNUT Installation Tool
–UN–23OCT02
A50745
OUO1073,000187F –19–23OCT02–4/5
5. Hold socket head stationary with wrench (A). Rotate

hex nut (B) clockwise until firm resistance is felt.
6. Shoulder of RIVNUT (C) will collapse and hold tight

against tank.
–UN–23OCT02
7. Break hex nut loose with counterclockwise movement
and remove both wrenches.
8. Remove tool by turning entire tool counterclockwise.

A50746
A—Wrench
B—Hex Nut
–UN–23OCT02
A50747
OUO1073,000187F –19–23OCT02–5/5

012606
PN=110
Section 30
Planting Units
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-1

Vacuum Seed Metering Mechanisms Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-2
Essential or Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-1 TRU-VEE Double Disk Opener Exploded
Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-1 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-4
Remove Vacuum Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-2 PRO-SERIES Double Disk Opener
Vacuum Meter Field Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-3 Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-7
Vacuum Seed Meter Exploded View . . . . . . . . .30-05-5 Inspect and Adjust Seed Opener Blades . . . . . .30-20-8 30
Repair Vacuum Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-6 Replace Seed Opener Blades and Seed
Inspect Vacuum Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-7 Tube Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-10
Remove and Install Vacuum Meter Brush . . . . .30-05-9 Gauge Wheels—Exploded View (S.N. —
Adjust Vacuum Meter Baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-10 710100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-13
Inspect Seed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-11 Gauge Wheels—Exploded View (S.N.
Adjust Meter Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-11 710101— ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-15
Install New Vacuum Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-13 Gauge Wheel Bearing Replacement (S.N. —
Install Knockout Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-14 710100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-16
Install Double Eliminator for Sweet Corn Gauge Wheel Bearing Replacement (S.N.
and Edible-Beans—Flat Type Seed Disk . . .30-05-15 710101— ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-19
Install Seed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-17 Adjust Gauge Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-20
Replace Scrapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-21
Group 10—MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Replace Heavy-Duty Scrapers . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-22
Plateless Seed Metering Mechanisms
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-1
Group 25—Closing Wheels
Finger Pick-Up Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-2
Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-1
Inspect Finger Pick-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-1
Remove and Install Finger Pick-Up . . . . . . . . . .30-10-5
Closing Wheels Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-2
Disassemble Feed Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-11
Closing Wheel
Assemble Feed Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-12
Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-3
Install Feed Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-13
Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-4
Disassemble Radial Bean Meter . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-14
Staggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-4
Assemble Radial Bean Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-17
Adjust Closing Wheel Down Force . . . . . . . . . .30-25-5
Remove and Install Seed Tube . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-21
Disassemble and Assemble Row Cleaner
Unit with Tapered Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-6
Group 15—PRO-SERIES XP Vacuum Seed
Metering Mechanisms
PRO-SERIES Row Unit Vacuum Seed Meter Group 30—Insecticide/Herbicide Meter
Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-2 Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-1
Install New Vacuum Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-1
Remove and Install Vacuum Meter . . . . . . . . . .30-15-4 Calibrate Insecticide/Herbicide Meter . . . . . . . .30-30-1
Remove and Install Seed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-6 Insecticide/Herbicide Meter Drive Alignment . . .30-30-4
Inspect Vacuum Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-6
Remove and Install Vacuum Meter Brush . . . . .30-15-8 Group 35—Coulter
Adjust Meter Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-9 Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-1
Repair Pro-Shaft Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-1
Adjust Coulter Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-2
Group 20—Seed Openers
Essential or Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-1 Continued on next page

012606
PN=1
Contents
Page
Group 40—Down Force Springs

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-1
Down Force Springs-Light Duty
Non-Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-1
Down Force Springs-Double, Light Duty
Non-Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-2
Remove and Install Heavy-Duty Down Force
Spring Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-3
Repair Heavy-Duty Down Force Spring
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-6
30

012606
PN=2
Group 05
MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Vacuum Seed Metering Mecha-
nisms
ESSENTIAL TOOLS listed are required to perform the
job correctly and are obtainable only from
Catalogs.
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company OUO6046,0001C3D –19–15MAR04–1/2
3-Jaw Puller1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTC NO.1021

30
Remove retainer from vacuum seed meter. 05
1
1
Recommended Tool.
OUO6046,0001C3D –19–15MAR04–2/2
Other Material
Number Name Use
TY25797 (U.S.) Slip Plate Used to lubricate seed disks.
PM37477 (U.S.) Thread Lock and Sealer (Medium Used to prevent loosening of screws
PM38622 (Canadian) Strength) on flex drive.
242 (LOCTITE)
TY6341 (U.S.) Multi-Purpose SD Polyurea Used to lubricate bearing area of flex

drive meter coupling.
TY6333 (U.S.) Special Purpose HD Moly Used to lubricate flex drive.
OUO6089,0000138 –19–11AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=113
MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Vacuum Seed Metering Mechanisms
Remove Vacuum Meter

rearward.
A—Hopper Latch
–UN–13NOV02
A51025
OUO6089,000037C –19–11NOV02–1/4
2. Remove vacuum hose (A) from metering unit.

30
05
A—Vacuum Hose
2
–UN–13NOV02
A51026
OUO6089,000037C –19–11NOV02–2/4
3. Squeeze retainer (A); then pull vacuum monitoring

hose out of connector on units attached to monitor.
A—Retainer
–UN–12JAN96
A38890
OUO6089,000037C –19–11NOV02–3/4
4. Remove nuts (A) and lift vacuum meter from hopper.
A—Nut (2 used)
–UN–07NOV01
A48243
OUO6089,000037C –19–11NOV02–4/4

012606
PN=114
Vacuum Meter Field Test
1. Remove vacuum meter from seed hopper. (See

REMOVE VACUUM METER in this group.)
2. Start vacuum blowers and fill row unit seed disks

(except the removed meter) with seed.
3. Adjust vacuum level to recommended inches of water.
–UN–27JAN99
A43215
30
05
3
OUO6089,0000148 –19–29OCT01–1/5
4. Attach vacuum hose to removed meter.
–UN–27JAN99
A43216
OUO6089,0000148 –19–29OCT01–2/5
5. Construct cardboard seed chute similar to the one

shown.
–UN–27JAN99
A43217
Continued on next page OUO6089,0000148 –19–29OCT01–3/5

012606
PN=115
6. Fill chute with seed; turn meter coupling by hand at

field speed (one turn every 2 seconds is a typical
meter speed when planting corn at normal speed and
high population).
–UN–27JAN99
A43220
OUO6089,0000148 –19–29OCT01–4/5
7. Observe seeds on the cells through the top hole in

30 meter. Each cell should contain one seed, as shown.
05
4 a. If there are cells with no seeds, increase the
vacuum level.
b. If doubles are observed, lower the vacuum level.
–UN–27JAN99
8. Slightly jar meter to simulate row unit bounce; watch
for seeds that easily drop from the seed disk. Increase
A43218
vacuum level if seeds drop from plate.
NOTE: Different disk selection may be required if baffle is

set correctly.
9. If skips and doubles are observed, see ADJUST

VACUUM METER BAFFLE in this section.
OUO6089,0000148 –19–29OCT01–5/5

012606
PN=116
Vacuum Seed Meter Exploded View
7 11
10
12
1 5 9
8
6
2 4
15
13
3 14
16
18
19
23 30
20
25 05
24 5
21 26 27
17 28
22
29
30
32
31
33
35
34
33 36
–UN–17OCT01
39
40 37
38
A48172
1—Cam 11—Pin 21—Spring Locking Pin 31—Screw (2 used)
2—Double Eliminator 12—Knockout Assembly 22—Cover 32—Spring Locking Pin
3—Dual Lock Fastener 13—Scraper 23—Handle 33—Spring (2 used)
4—Screw 14—Pan Head Screw (3 used) 24—Spring 34—Inner Drive
5—Seal 15—Housing 25—Bushing 35—Flex Drive
6—Chamber 16—Bearing 26—Brush Holder 36—Outer Drive
7—Arm 17—Latch 27—Seed Disk 37—Lock Assembly
8—Knocker 18—Seal 28—Brush 38—Pin
9—Spring 19—Baffle 29—Cover 39—Spring
10—Support 20—Hub 30—Flex Drive Assembly 40—Lock
OUO6089,00000FD –19–17JAN06–1/1

012606
PN=117
Repair Vacuum Meter
NOTE: Use vacuum meter exploded view as a guide for

disassembly and assembly of vacuum meter.
• Remove bushing (25), using OTC NO.1021 3-Jaw

Puller or equivalent.
• Inspect all parts for wear and damage and replace as
necessary. (See INSPECT VACUUM METER in this
group.)
30
05
6
OUO6046,0001C5F –19–11AUG05–1/2
• Disassemble and clean flex drive.
NOTE: Install springs in flex drive assembly with open

end of hooks turned away from screw as shown.
• Grease bearing area with TY6341 Multi-Purpose SD

Polyurea Grease before assembly.
• Fill assembly cavity (1/2 full) with TY6341 Multi-Purpose
SD Polyurea Grease.
• Apply PM37477 Thread Lock and Sealer to screws.
–UN–10SEP99
A43593
Springs in Flex Drive Assembly
OUO6046,0001C5F –19–11AUG05–2/2

012606
PN=118
Inspect Vacuum Meter
1. Check brush (A) for gaps. If gaps are big enough to

allow seed to pass through, replace brush. (See
REMOVE and INSTALL BRUSH in this group.)
–UN–08MAY90
2. Check hub seal (D) for weathered or cracked
conditions. Replace as necessary.
A—Brush
H41910
B—Narrow End
C—Housing
D—Seal
30
05
7
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001BB8 –19–18DEC03–1/4

012606
PN=119
30
05
8
–19–31JAN89
A32818
A—Wear Example B—Corners C—Wear Example D—Wear Example
3. Check seed disks for wear in following areas. • Check for wear around perimeter of disk (A).
• Check seed cells (B) for wear of sharp corners
• Check gap between disk and housing to see if and residue left behind. Replace seed disk if size
seed can leak through. If seed leakage occurs, of cell is significantly increased and/or residue is
see ADJUST METER HUB in this group. excessive.
• Small grooves or scratches are acceptable on
NOTE: A small amount of wear around disk is vacuum side of seed disk (C).
acceptable, however seed must not be able to • Wear around perimeter of disk (D) is acceptable
leak through between disk and housing. up to an approximate depth of 1.0 mm (3/64 in.).
OUO6046,0001BB8 –19–18DEC03–2/4
4. Inspect vacuum seals (A) for large cracks or wear

areas. Replace as necessary. (See INSTALL VACUUM
SEAL in this group.)
5. Replace seed disk wiper (B) if edge of wiper is

grooved or excessively worn.
–UN–01AUG02
A—Seals
B—Wiper
A49716

012606
PN=120
6. Inspect vacuum meter dust cover (A) for cracks or

weathered conditions. Replace as necessary.
7. Inspect latch (B); replace if cracked or broken.
8. Inspect plastic insert (C) and chute cover (D), replace

parts if worn.
9. Inspect flex-drive assembly to verify drive coupler

pivots freely. Repair as necessary. (See REPAIR FLEX
DRIVE in this group.)
–UN–05DEC02
A—Dust Cover
B—Handle
C—Plastic Insert
D—Chute Cover
30
A51322
05
9
OUO6046,0001BB8 –19–18DEC03–4/4
Remove and Install Vacuum Meter Brush
1. Remove existing brush; pulling upward at corner.
NOTE: Brush must be installed with notch (A) on side

shown for proper operation.
–UN–04MAY90
NOTE: There are two style of brushes, long and short.
2. Install recommended brush per application. (See
H41535
Machine Operator’s Manual.)
3. Snap brush into slot until it contacts side of meter Long Brush Shown
housing (B).
A—Notch
B—Meter Housing
–UN–04MAY90
H41536
Short Brush Shown

OUO6089,000010B –19–21NOV02–1/1

012606
PN=121
Adjust Vacuum Meter Baffle
NOTE: Lower position (B) is recommended for smaller

seeded crops such as: sugar beets, sorghum, oil
sunflower and popcorn.
Upper position (C) is recommended for larger

seeded crops such as: corn, soybeans, cotton,
edible beans, peanuts, sweet corn and
confectionary sunflower.
• Move tab (A) to position recommended. (See VACUUM

METER RATE CHARTS Section in Machine Operator’s
Manual.)
–UN–19JUN90
30
05 A—Tab
10 B—Lower Position
C—Upper Position
H42249
Lower Baffle Position
–UN–19JUN90
H42250
Upper Baffle Position
OUO6089,0000103 –19–03OCT01–1/1

012606
PN=122
Inspect Seed Disk
1. Check seed cell and hole (A) for flash (particles of

material left behind in molding process.)
NOTE: Replace disk if flash can not be easily removed.
–UN–27JUL00
2. Remove any flash before installing seed disk.
A—Flash
A46242
OUO6089,0000104 –19–03OCT01–1/1
Adjust Meter Hub

30
1. Turn hub handle (A) counterclockwise; then remove 05
seed disk (B) from housing. 11
A—Hub Handle
B—Seed Disk
–UN–03NOV03
A53299

012606
PN=123
2. Remove spring locking pin (A).
3. Adjust hub (B) as follows:
a. Hold meter flex-drive (C).
b. Turn hub clockwise to move seed disk closer to

meter housing or counterclockwise to move seed
disk farther from meter housing.
4. Turn hub until slot aligns with hole in shaft and install
spring locking pin (A).
–UN–02DEC02
5. Install seed disk. (See INSTALL SEED DISK in this
group.)
30
A51320
05 A—Pin
12 B—Hub
C—Flex-Drive
–UN–14APR92
H44310
OUO6046,0001BB9 –19–18DEC03–2/2

012606
PN=124
Install New Vacuum Seal
IMPORTANT: There are two types of vacuum meter

seals available for machines (S.N. —
715100). Chain driven meters use a soft
seal and meters using Pro-Shaft drive
are equipped with a hard seal. Do not
mix seal types across planter. If meters
are currently equipped with soft seals
and ALL seals on planter are to be
–UN–03NOV03
replaced, use hard seals. Machines
(S.N. 715101—) are equipped with a
hard seal.
A53300
1. Remove old vacuum seal by grasping and pulling seal
from groove.
30
A—Corners 05
NOTE: This procedure prevents excessive slack in seal. B—Dimples 13
2. Install new seal by first inserting corners of seal (A).
3. Align dimples on seal and housing at three locations

(B); insert seal at locations.
4. Insert remaining portions of seal.
OUO6089,000053F –19–10AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=125
Install Knockout Assembly
1. Loosen screws (B) and remove wiper assembly (C).
2. Install knockout assembly (A); using screws (B).
3. Close dome; verify wheel is running in the track on
–UN–04FEB03
seed disk.
A—Knockout Wheel
A51650
B—Screw (2 used)
C—Wiper Assembly
30
05
14
–UN–19NOV02
A51175
OUO6089,0000541 –19–04NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=126
Install Double Eliminator for Sweet Corn and

Edible-Beans—Flat Type Seed Disk
NOTE: Double eliminator (A) is used to displace any

extra seeds carried in vacuum hole. “Saw-tooth
design” gradually covers part of vacuum hole.
–UN–27APR93
Hole (G) is used for edible beans and hole (I) is
used for sweet corn.
H44092
1. Install double eliminator (B) in housing (C).
2. Insert dual-lock fasteners (D) through housing and hole

(E) of double eliminator (B).
3. Insert cam nut (F) into rear of housing at hole (G). 30

05
4. Install screw (H) through double eliminator and into 15
cam nut (F). DO NOT tighten.
A—Double Eliminator
B—Double Eliminator
C—Housing
D—Fasteners
E—Hole, Dual-Lock Fastener
F—Cam Nut
–UN–27APR93
G—Hole, Edible-Bean
H—Screw
I—Hole, Sweet Corn
H44093
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001BBA –19–18DEC03–1/2

012606
PN=127
5. Install sweet corn or edible-bean disk (A). (See

INSTALL SEED DISK in this group.)
6. Turn cam nut (C) to increase or decrease vacuum hole

coverage.
7. Tighten screw (E) when double eliminator (D) is in

position.
8. Set all rows the same.
A—Disk
–UN–19NOV02
B—Gap
C—Cam Nut
D—Double Eliminator
E—Screw
30
A51174
05
16
–UN–31JAN01
A47075
D
OUO6046,0001BBA –19–18DEC03–2/2

012606
PN=128
Install Seed Disk
1. Install seed disk (A) into housing.
2. Rotate hub handle (B) while holding seed disk

stationary.
–UN–13JUN00
NOTE: Seed disk should turn smoothly with light contact
or a small gap between seed disk (A) and meter
housing. Seed should not leak around
A46247
circumference of meter. When planting small
seed, such as sorghum or sugar beets, seed disk
must lightly contact housing to prevent seed
leakage.
3. Turn seed disk by hand and check gap between seed

30
disk and meter housing in section (C). If disk turns too 05
hard or if seed leaks through gap, adjust hub position. 17
(See ADJUST METER HUB in this group.)
A—Seed Disk
B—Hub Handle
C—Section
–UN–19NOV02
A51177
OUO6046,0001BBB –19–18DEC03–1/1

012606
PN=129
30
05
18

012606
PN=130
Group 10
MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Plateless Seed Metering Mecha-
nisms
Specifications
Plateless Metering Mechanism Clearance 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) with light tension
Finger Holder-to-Carrier on a finger tab adjacent to area
being measured.
Radial Bean Meter Singulating Brush Minimum Thickness 3 mm

(0.125 in.)
Plateless Metering Mechanism Feed Axial Movement 0.38—0.7 mm

Cup Assembly (0.015—0.030 in.)
Metering Bowl-to-Seed Retainer Clearance 1.9—2.3 mm

(0.075—0.090 in.)
30
10
1
OUO6089,000013B –19–20NOV02–1/1

012606
PN=131
MAXEMERGE Plus/MAXEMERGE XP Plateless Seed Metering Mechanisms
Finger Pick-Up Exploded View
4
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
12
44 9
28 13
45
22
27
21 10
26
25 16
30 24
23 3
10
20 2
2 29 19 11
31 18 14
30 17
32
15
33
34 35
36
39
38
–UN–08DEC03
43 37
40
41
A53451
39
1—Cap Screw 12—Cap Screw 24—Cradle 35—Washer

2—Washer 13—Brush 25—Housing 36—Cap Screw
3—Washer 14—Cap Screw and Nut 26—Spring Pin 37—Cap Screw
4—Cover 15—Deflector 27—Bearing 38—Drive Coupler
5—Belt 16—Cotter Pin 28—Spring Pin 39—Spring
6—Driver 17—Nut Cover 29—Bolt and Flange Nut 40—Coupler Drive
7—Housing 18—Nut 30—Nut 41—Spring Locking Pin
8—Cap Screw 19—Holder 31—Flange 42—Drive Coupler
9—Cap Screw, Washer and 20—Cam 32—Washer 43—Roller Chain
Nut 21—Spring 33—Chain Sprocket 44—Roller
10—Cover 22—Finger 34—Ball Bearing 45—Bushing
11—Nut 23—Pan Head Screw
Use as a guide when disassembling and assembling

finger pick-up assembly.
OUO6046,0001B96 –19–08DEC03–1/1

012606
PN=132
Inspect Finger Pick-Up
1. Disengage latch (A); lift upward then rearward.
2. Remove seed hopper and turn upside down.
–UN–13NOV02
A—Hopper Latch
A51025
OUO6089,000037D –19–21NOV02–1/4
3. Remove wing nuts (A).

30
10
A—Wing Nut
3
–UN–13OCT88
A30212
OUO6089,000037D –19–21NOV02–2/4
4. Remove three cap screws and baffle (B) from front of

finger pick-up assembly (A).
A—Assembly
B—Baffle
–UN–13OCT88
A28428
Continued on next page OUO6089,000037D –19–21NOV02–3/4

012606
PN=133
IMPORTANT: Never turn finger pick-up mechanism

backward. Damage to brush will result.
5. Turn finger pick-up by hand making sure springs are

holding tabs of fingers in contact with carrier plate in
appropriate area (A) and cam is raising fingers properly
in remaining area (B).
6. Raise finger tab until contact with carrier plate is felt.
7. Check for specification between finger holder and

carrier using a feeler gauge.
Specification
Finger Holder and Carrier—
Clearance ..................................................................................... 0.15 mm
–UN–03AUG00
30 (0.006 in.)
10
4
A—Seed Holding Area
B—Seed Release Area
A46468
–UN–04NOV02
A50051
OUO6089,000037D –19–21NOV02–4/4

012606
PN=134
Remove and Install Finger Pick-Up
1. Remove cotter pin (A), nut lock (B) and adjusting nut
from shaft.
2. Lift finger pick-up assembly off shaft.
A—Cotter Pin
B—Nut Lock
–UN–03AUG00
30
10
5
A46469
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–1/17
3. Remove springs (A) and finger (B) from carrier.
A—Spring (11 used)

B—Pick-Up Finger (12 used)
–UN–04NOV02
A50028
Continued on next page OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–2/17

012606
PN=135
NOTE: Replace carrier plates when hard chrome surface

has worn away and case-hardened steel begins to
wear. This will be identifiable by a change in
shape of dimples (A).
4. Check dimples (A) on carrier plate for wear.
–UN–04NOV02
A—Dimples
A50030
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–3/17
NOTE: When replacing fingers, install springs with open

30 end of spring loop toward inside of finger holder.
10
6 5. Install springs (A) on fingers (B).
6. Install pick-up fingers (B) on carrier.
A—Spring (11 used)

B—Finger (12 used)
–UN–04NOV02
A50028
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–4/17
7. Remove nuts (A), seal (B) and cover (C).
A—Nuts (5 used)
B—Seal
C—Cover
–UN–16DEC02
A51500

012606
PN=136
NOTE: Note direction of fins (C) on belt (B) for

installation.
8. Remove idler (A) and belt (B).
A—Idler
B—Belt
C—Fins
–UN–16DEC02
A51501
30
10
7
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–6/17
9. Remove cap screws (A), bearing and shaft assembly

(B).

B—Bearing and Shaft Assembly
–UN–16DEC02
A51502

012606
PN=137
10. Remove pin (A) from bearing and shaft assembly (C).
11. Press bearing and shaft assembly (C) out of hub (B).
12. Inspect components, replace as necessary.
–UN–16DEC02
13. Turn hub over and press bearing and shaft assembly
(C) into hub (B) until fully seated.
14. Install pin (A).
A51503
A—Pin
B—Hub
C—Bearing and Shaft Assembly
30
10
8
–UN–16DEC02
A51504
Removing Bearing and Shaft Assembly from Hub
Installing Bearing and Shaft Assembly in Hub –UN–16DEC02

A51505
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–8/17
15. Install bearing and shaft assembly (B) using cap

screws (A).

B—Bearing and Shaft Assembly
–UN–16DEC02
A51502

012606
PN=138
NOTE: Belt (B) must be installed with fins (C) in proper

direction.
16. Install belt (B) and idler (A).
A—Idler
B—Belt
C—Fins
–UN–16DEC02
A51501
30
10
9
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–10/17
17. Install cover (C), seal (B) and nuts (A).
A—Nuts (5 used)
B—Seal
C—Cover
–UN–16DEC02
A51500
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–11/17
18. Install carrier (A) to carrier plate (B) while aligning

notch (C) in bearing with projection on cam (D).
A—Carrier
B—Carrier Plate
C—Notch
–UN–30AUG02
D—Cam
A50053

012606
PN=139
IMPORTANT: Never turn finger pick-up mechanism

backward. Damage to brush will result.
NOTE: Pick-up finger should seat in holder so holder is

flush with carrier plate when assembled.
–UN–30AUG02
19. Install adjusting nut (B) on shaft.
20. Turn adjusting nut clockwise by hand until it contacts

pick-up finger holder and a slight resistance is felt.
A50033
Make sure pick-up finger holder (A) is seated firmly
against carrier plate.
21. Turn adjusting nut two flats clockwise (one third turn). A—Carrier
B—Adjusting Nut
NOTE: Finger holder must be adjusted firmly against
30
10 carrier but still turn by hand with moderate force.
10
22. Turn pick-up finger holder by hand to ensure
mechanism is not over tightened.
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–13/17
23. Raise pick-up finger tab (A) until contact with carrier
plate is felt.
A—Finger Tab
–UN–04NOV02
A50020
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–14/17
24. Check for specification between pick-up finger holder

and carrier using a feeler gauge.
Specification
Pick-Up Finger Holder and
Carrier—Clearance ....................................................................... 0.15 mm
(0.006 in.)
–UN–04NOV02
A50051

012606
PN=140
25. Maintain carrier (C) adjustment with lock nut (B) and
cotter pin (A).
A—Cotter Pin
B—Lock Nut
C—Carrier
–UN–30AUG02
A50021
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–16/17
26. Meter brush (A) length should cover at least one-half

the tab on pick-up finger (B). 30
10
11
A—Brush
B—Pick-Up Finger
–UN–30AUG02
A50049
OUO6089,0000110 –19–21NOV02–17/17
Disassemble Feed Cup
1. Remove locking nuts (G).
2. Remove feed cup housing (F).
–UN–13SEP99
NOTE: Shaft has left-hand thread.
3. Remove feed cup shaft (E).
A43605
4. Remove feed cup (D) from adapter.
Feed Cup—Exploded View

A—Feed Cup Adapter
B—Seed Guide
C—Spacer Washers for Low Rate Sorghum Feed Cup
D—Feed Cup
E—Feed Cup Shaft
F—Feed Cup Housing
G—Locking Nut (2 used)

012606
PN=141
5. Remove seed guide (A or B) from adapter.
6. Inspect parts for signs of wear or a buildup of seed
–UN–02AUG89
treatment material. Clean or replace parts as required.
A—Bean Seed Guide

B—High Rate Sorghum Seed Guide
A15894
Bean and Sorghum Seed Guides
OUO6089,0000111 –19–20NOV02–2/2
Assemble Feed Cup

30
10 IMPORTANT: When replacing worn cups, we
12 recommend replacing all rows on a
machine at same time to keep seeding
rate even.1
–UN–11OCT88
IMPORTANT: When assembling feed cup mechanism,
refer to Machine Operator’s Manual for
recommended feed cups for seed
A32836
variety being used.
IMPORTANT: Three washer shims must be used with

low-rate feed cup. Do not operate A—Housing
B—Feed Cup
without all three shims.
C—Washer Shims
For small seed or if population is high, use three washer

shims (C) between feed cup (B) and housing (A) only.
1
Replacement feed cups are available through service parts.
OUO6089,0000114 –19–04OCT01–1/4
For medium size seed, use two washer shims (C)

between feed cup (B) and housing (A) and one washer
shim (C) between feed cup and seed guide.
A—Housing
B—Feed Cup
–UN–11OCT88
C—Washer Shims
A32837

012606
PN=142
For larger seed, use one washer shim (C) between feed
cup (B) and housing (A) and two washer shims (C)
between feed cup and seed guide.
A—Housing
B—Feed Cup
–UN–11OCT88
C—Washer Shim
A32838
OUO6089,0000114 –19–04OCT01–3/4
For large seed use three washer shims (B) between feed
cup (A) and seed guide. 30
10
13
A—Feed Cup
B—Washer Shim (3 used)
–UN–11OCT88
A32839
OUO6089,0000114 –19–04OCT01–4/4
Install Feed Cup
1. Install seed guide on feed cup adapter so it seats

properly on mounting studs (A).
NOTE: Aligning notch must be positioned correctly so
–UN–29MAY92
feed cup housing seats properly.
2. Align notch (B) in seed guide with projection on

adapter.
A—Studs H44521
B—Notch

012606
PN=143
3. Attach feed cup and housing to adapter with wing nuts

(A).
A—Wing Nut
–UN–21MAY92
H44522
OUO6089,0000113 –19–04OCT01–2/2
Disassemble Radial Bean Meter

30
10 1. Disengage seed hopper latch (A). Lift hopper upward
14 then rearward.
A—Hopper Latch
–UN–13NOV02
A51025
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–1/10
2. Remove seed hopper from planting unit. Turn hopper

upside down and remove two wing nuts (A).
3. Pull radial bean meter assembly straight up and

remove from hopper.
–UN–06NOV96
A—Wing Nut
A40459
Seed Hopper Wing Nuts
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–2/10

012606
PN=144
CAUTION: Follow chemical manufacturer’s

precautions when handling parts coated with
seed treatments. Use proper skin, eye, and
respiratory protection.
4. Inspect knockout wheel (A) for excessive wear.
–UN–06NOV96
Replace if wheel fails to contact seed bowl.
A—Knockout Wheel
A40465
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–3/10
5. Remove dust cover (B) and meter outlet cover (A).

30
10
A—Outlet Cover
15
B—Dust Cover
–UN–08APR97
A41433
Dust and Meter Outlet Covers
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–4/10
6. Remove parts (A—D).
7. Clean debris from meter.
A—Soybean Metering Bowl

B—Drive Coupler
–UN–08APR97
C—Spring Locking pin

D—Wing Nut (3 used)
A41435

012606
PN=145
8. Remove parts (A—C).
9. Discard spring pin (B) and push-on ring (C).
10. Inspect green retaining brush for wear.
–UN–08APR97
A—Meter Hub
B—Spring Pin
C—Push-On Ring
A41436
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–6/10
11. Wear of green retaining brush at cleanout “bump” (A)

30 is normal and expected. Meter will operate properly
10 with these fibers worn off.
16
A—Bump
–UN–06NOV96
A40464
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–7/10
12. Remove screw (B).
13. Remove parts (A) and (C—F).
A—Singulating Brush
B—Cap Screw
–UN–08APR97
C—Brush Cover
D—Meter Lining
E—Seed Retainer
F—Seed Regulator
A41437

012606
PN=146
14. Check singling brush (A) for wear. If brush thickness

is less than specification or if upper tip of brush is
below top of green retaining brush (B) when
assembled in meter, replace singling brush.
Specification
–UN–06NOV96
Singling Brush—Thickness............................................................... 3 mm
(1/8 in.)
A—Brush
A40463
B—Retaining Brush
30
10
17
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–9/10
15. Remove shoulder bolt (C).
16. Remove spring (A) and knockout wheel assembly (B).
17. Inspect and replace parts as necessary.
–UN–08APR97
A—Spring
B—Knockout Wheel Assembly
C—Shoulder Bolt
A41439
OUO6046,0001B97 –19–08DEC03–10/10
Assemble Radial Bean Meter
NOTE: Curled end of spring must be hooked on knockout

wheel arm.
1. Install spring (A) and knockout wheel assembly (B),

–UN–08APR97
using shoulder bolt (C).
A—Spring
B—Knockout Wheel Assembly
A41439
C—Shoulder Bolt

012606
PN=147
2. Install parts (A) and (C—F). Make sure curl on meter

lining (D) is hooked on meter housing.
3. Install screw (B).
A—Singulating Brush
–UN–08APR97
B—Cap Screw
C—Brush Cover
D—Meter Lining
E—Seed Retainer
F—Seed Regulator
A41437
30
10
18
OUO6089,0000149 –19–29OCT01–2/7
NOTE: Meter hub (A) may have tight fit on bearing shaft
during installation.
4. Using new spring pin (B) and new push-on ring (C),
install parts (A—C).
–UN–08APR97
A—Meter Hub
B—Spring Pin
C—Push-On Ring
A41436

012606
PN=148
NOTE: Knockout wheel must not be in contact with

metering bowl (A) when adjustment is made.
5. Check clearance between metering bowl and seed

retainer using setting “C” on metering bowl.
–UN–19JUN97
6. Clearance between metering bowl (A) and seed
retainer (G) should be within specification.
Specification
A41454
Metering Bowl-to-Seed
Retainer—Clearance ............................................................ 1.9—2.3 mm
(0.075—0.090 in.)
7. If clearance is not within specification, adjust as

follows:
30
NOTE: Clearance will change approximately 0.25 mm 10
(0.010 in.) with each hole. 19
–UN–16DEC99
1. Remove spring pin (E).
2. Turn meter hub (F) to next hole.
3. Install spring pin (E).
4. Repeat procedure until clearance is achieved.
A45679
8. Install parts (A—D). After adjustment, knockout wheel Metering Bowl Clearance
must rotate when metering bowl (A) is rotated.
A—Metering Bowl
B—Drive Coupler
C—Spring Locking Pin
D—Wing Nut (3 used)
E—Spring Pin
F—Meter Hub
G—Seed Retainer

012606
PN=149
9. Bench test radial bean meter as follows:
a. Set meter to correct meter bowl setting (A, B, or C).
b. Fill meter with seeds.
–UN–19JUN97
c. Mark meter housing to metering bowl (B) using a
paint pencil.
d. Load cells (C) with seed by turning metering bowl
A41453
several times.
e. Turn radial bean meter so seed inlet is horizontal,

as if installed on planter. A—Meter Bowl Setting (A, B, or C)
B—Meter Housing to Metering Bowl Mark
C—Metering Bowl Cells
NOTE: After one revolution, 56 ± 2 seeds should leave D—Seeds Leaving Meter
30
10 meter.
20
f. Turn metering bowl one revolution and catch seeds
leaving meter (D).
g. If incorrect number of seeds leave meter, use the

following instructions.
• Check that meter position (A, B, or C) is correct.

• Check for wear groove on seed retainer. If wear
groove exists and seed count is not correct,
replace seed retainer.
OUO6089,0000149 –19–29OCT01–5/7
10. Install meter outlet cover (A) and dust cover (B).
A—Outlet Cover
B—Dust Cover
–UN–08APR97
A41433
Meter Outlet and Dust Covers

012606
PN=150
11. Install radial bean meter assembly on hopper using

two wing nuts (A).
12. Install seed hopper on planting unit.
A—Wing Nut
–UN–06NOV96
A40459
Radial Bean Meter Assembly Wing Nuts
30
10
21
OUO6089,0000149 –19–29OCT01–7/7
Remove and Install Seed Tube

rearward.
2. Remove hopper and meter units.
–UN–13NOV02
3. Disconnect seed sensor connector.
A—Hopper Latch
A51025
OUO6046,0001BBC –19–18DEC03–1/3
4. Pull back at seed tube (A) to remove tabs (B).
5. Pull seed tube (A) from row unit.
6. Inspect and/or replace as necessary. –UN–18DEC03
7. Install in reverse order using the following instructions:
A—Seed Tube
B—Tabs
A53528
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001BBC –19–18DEC03–2/3

012606
PN=151
• Insert seed tube (A) into row unit, aligning hook (B)
with alignment pin (C).
A—Seed Tube
B—Hook
C—Alignment Pin
–UN–27OCT03
A53216
30
10
22
–UN–03NOV03
A53298
OUO6046,0001BBC –19–18DEC03–3/3

012606
PN=152
Group 15
PRO-SERIES XP Vacuum Seed Metering Mechanisms
30
15
1

012606
PN=153
PRO-SERIES Row Unit Vacuum Seed Meter Exploded View
6
39
7
5
3 4
2
30
15 1
2
40
29 11
30
9
10
27
37
36
28 25
35
34 38 12
31
33 13
32
26 24
15 14
38
23
16
19
17
–UN–08JAN04
20 18
21
22
A53312
Continued on next page OUO6089,00004E1 –19–30SEP03–1/2

012606
PN=154
1—Lid 12—Brush 23—Hopper 31—Knob

2—Hub Seal 13—Brush Retainer 24—Window 32—Washer
3—Hub 14—Latch 25—Quick Connect Coupler 33—Spring Washer
4—Locking Pin 15—Housing 26—Screw 34—Insert
5—Handle 16—Hold Down Latch 27—Screen 35—Cam
6—Disk 17—Chute Cover 28—Bracket 36—Double Eliminator
7—Compression Spring 18—Dust Cover 29—Discharge Hose (Milo 37—Shoulder Screw
8—Vacuum Chamber 19—Shaft Extension, Long Only) 38—Shoulder Screw
9—Brush Retainer 20—Meter Drive 30—Discharge Hose 39—Bushing
10—Brush 21—Shaft Extension, Short (Standard) 40—Lanyard
11—Brush 22—Handle
OUO6089,00004E1 –19–30SEP03–2/2
Install New Vacuum Seal

30
IMPORTANT: There are two types of vacuum meter 15
seals available for machines (S.N. — 3
715100). Chain driven meters use a soft
seal and meters using Pro-Shaft drive
are equipped with a hard seal. Do not
mix seal types across planter. If meters
are currently equipped with soft seals
and ALL seals on planter are to be
–UN–03NOV03
replaced, use hard seals. Machines
(S.N. 715101—) are equipped with a
hard seal.
A53300
1. Remove old vacuum seal by grasping and pulling seal
from groove.
A—Corners
NOTE: This procedure prevents excessive slack in seal. B—Dimples
2. Install new seal by first inserting corners of seal (A).
3. Align dimples on seal and housing at three locations

(B); insert seal at locations.
4. Insert remaining portions of seal.
OUO6089,000053F –19–10AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=155
Remove and Install Vacuum Meter
1. Remove seed delivery hose (A) and vacuum hose (B)

from meter.
–UN–13SEP02
B—Vacuum Hose
A50268
OUO6046,0001BBD –19–18DEC03–1/6
2. Remove vacuum gauge hose (A) (if equipped).

30
15
A—Vacuum Gauge Hose
4
–UN–23AUG02
A49974
OUO6046,0001BBD –19–18DEC03–2/6
3. Rotate lever (A) 180°; then pull cable (B) from rear
meter drive gearbox (C).
4. Push down on clip (D) while lifting upward on meter

latch (E). Lift rear of meter upward and remove.
–UN–27NOV02
A—Lever
B—Cable
C—Meter Drive Gearbox
D—Clip
E—Meter Latch A51297
–UN–12JAN04
A53529
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001BBD –19–18DEC03–3/6

012606
PN=156
5. Remove pin (A) and knob (B).
A—Pin
B—Knob
–UN–27NOV02
A51260
OUO6046,0001BBD –19–18DEC03–4/6
6. Remove cotter pin (A) and meter drive gearbox (B).

30
15
A—Cotter Pin
5
B—Meter Drive Gearbox
–UN–05AUG02
A49741
OUO6046,0001BBD –19–18DEC03–5/6
7. Remove screws (A) and hopper (B) from meter (C).
8. Inspect and replace as necessary. (See INSPECT

VACUUM METER in this group.)
–UN–05AUG02
A—Screw (10 used)
B—Hopper
C—Meter
A49745
OUO6046,0001BBD –19–18DEC03–6/6

012606
PN=157
Remove and Install Seed Disk
1. Rotate hub handle (A) counterclockwise while holding

seed disk (B) stationary.
2. Remove seed disk (B).
3. Inspect and replace seed disk as necessary. (See

INSPECT VACUUM METER in this group.
4. Install seed disk into housing.
–UN–04NOV02
5. Assemble in reverse order of disassembly.
NOTE: Seed disk should turn smoothly with light contact

or a small gap, between seed disk (B) and meter
30
A50861
15 housing. Seed should not leak around
6 circumference of meter. When planting small
seed, such as sorghum or sugar beets, seed disk
must lightly contact housing to prevent seed A—Hub Handle
leakage. B—Seed Disk
6. Turn seed disk by hand and check gap between seed

disk and meter housing, If disk turns too hard or if
seed leaks through gap, adjust hub position. (See
ADJUST METER HUB in this group.)
OUO6089,00002BB –19–01AUG02–1/1
Inspect Vacuum Meter
1. Check brush (A) for gaps. If gaps are large enough to

allow seed to pass through, replace brush. (See
REMOVE AND INSTALL VACUUM METER BRUSH in
this group.)
–UN–01AUG02
2. Inspect hub seal (B) for weathered or cracked

conditions. Replace as necessary.
A49715
A—Brush
B—Hub Seal
Continued on next page OUO1073,000182F –19–20SEP02–1/5

012606
PN=158
30
15
7
–19–31JAN89
A32818
A—Wear Example B—Corners C—Wear Example D—Wear Example
3. Check seed disks for wear in following areas. • Check for wear around perimeter of disk (A).
• Check seed cells (B) for wear of sharp corners
• Check gap between disk and housing to see if and residue left behind. Replace seed disk if size
seed can leak through. If seed leakage occurs, of cell is significantly increased and/or residue is
see ADJUST METER HUB in this group. excessive.
• Small grooves or scratches are acceptable on
NOTE: A small amount of wear around disk is vacuum side of seed disk (C).
acceptable, however seed must not be able to • Wear around perimeter of disk (D) is acceptable
leak through between disk and housing. up to an approximate depth of 1.0 mm (3/64 in.).
OUO1073,000182F –19–20SEP02–2/5
4. Inspect vacuum seal (A) for large cracks or wear

areas. Replace as necessary. (See INSTALL VACUUM
SEAL in this group.)
5. Replace seed disk wiper (B) if edge of wiper is

grooved or excessively worn.
–UN–01AUG02
A—Seal
B—Seed Disk Wiper
A49716
Continued on next page OUO1073,000182F –19–20SEP02–3/5

012606
PN=159
6. Inspect vacuum meter dust cover (A) for cracks or

weathered conditions. Replace as necessary.
7. Inspect latch (B); replace if cracked or broken.
8. Inspect plastic insert (C) and chute cover (D), replace

parts if worn.
A—Dust Cover
B—Handle
C—Plastic Insert
D—Chute Cover
–UN–04NOV02
30
A50862
15
8
OUO1073,000182F –19–20SEP02–4/5
NOTE: Meter drive gearboxes are not repairable. If

defective, they must be replaced.
9. Inspect meter drive assembly (A) to verify drive rotates

freely.
–UN–22NOV02
A—Meter Drive Gearbox
A51258
OUO1073,000182F –19–20SEP02–5/5
Remove and Install Vacuum Meter Brush
1. Remove existing brushes; pulling upward at corner.
NOTE: Brush must be installed with notch (A) on side

shown for proper operation.
–UN–01AUG02
2. Install brushes; snapping brush into slot until it contacts

side of meter housing.
A49733
A—Notch
OUO6089,00002B8 –19–11DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=160
Adjust Meter Hub
1. Turn hub handle (A) counterclockwise; then remove

seed disk (B) from housing.
A—Hub Handle
B—Seed Disk
–UN–04NOV02
30
A50861
15
9
OUO1073,0001831 –19–20SEP02–1/4
2. Remove spring locking pin (A).
3. Adjust hub (B) as follows:
A—Locking Pin
B—Hub
–UN–04NOV02
A49735
OUO1073,0001831 –19–20SEP02–2/4
a. Hold meter drive gearbox (A).
b. Turn hub clockwise to move seed disk closer to

meter housing or counterclockwise to move seed
disk farther from meter housing. –UN–22NOV02
A—Meter Drive Gearbox

A51258
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001831 –19–20SEP02–3/4

012606
PN=161
4. Turn hub until slot (A) aligns with hole in shaft and
install locking pin (B).
5. Install seed disk. (See INSTALL SEED DISK in this

group.)
–UN–01AUG02
6. Turn disk by hand and check gap between disk and
meter housing.
A—Hub Slot
A49736
B—Locking Pin
30
15
10
–UN–04NOV02
A49737
OUO1073,0001831 –19–20SEP02–4/4
Repair Pro-Shaft Drive
Replace Meter Drive Cable
1. Rotate lever (A) 180°; then pull cable (B) from meter
drive gearbox (C).
–UN–27NOV02
A—Lever
B—Cable
C—Gearbox
A51259
Continued on next page OUO1073,000189F –19–01NOV02–1/5

012606
PN=162
2. Remove roll pin (A); then pull cable (B) from front
meter gearbox.
NOTE: Drive cable cannot be repaired. If defective, it

must be replaced.
–UN–16SEP02
3. Inspect parts and replace if necessary.
IMPORTANT: When installing cable, tag (C) must be

installed in front meter drive gearbox.
A50287
Replace Rear Meter Drive Gearbox A—Roll Pin

B—Cable
C—Tag
1. Remove cable from meter drive. (See REPLACE
30
DRIVE CABLE in this group.) 15
11
OUO1073,000189F –19–01NOV02–2/5
NOTE: Meter removed for clarity. Meter does not have to

be removed to replace cable drive gearbox.
2. Remove cotter pin (A) and knob (B).
A—Cotter Pin
–UN–27NOV02
B—Knob
A51260
OUO1073,000189F –19–01NOV02–3/5
3. Remove cotter pin (A) and meter drive gearbox (B).
NOTE: Drive cannot be repaired.
4. Inspect gearbox and replace if necessary. –UN–05AUG02
A—Cotter Pin
B—Meter Drive Gearbox
A49741
Continued on next page OUO1073,000189F –19–01NOV02–4/5

012606
PN=163
Replace Front Meter Drive Gearbox
1. Remove drillshaft (A). (See procedure in Section 50.)
2. Remove cotter pins (B).
–UN–17SEP02
3. Remove front meter gearbox (C).
4. Inspect and replace as necessary.
A49769
A—Drill Shaft
B—Cotter Pin (2 used)
C—Front Meter Drive Gearbox
30
15
12
OUO1073,000189F –19–01NOV02–5/5

012606
PN=164
Group 20
Seed Openers
ESSENTIAL TOOLS listed are required to perform the
job correctly and are obtainable only from
Catalogs.
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company KC01776,00014A2 –19–20DEC02–1/2
Bearing Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG1347

3 2
30
To remove and install bearings on MAXEMERGE Plus 20
gauge wheels. (Note: This kit contains the following three 1
tools.)
–UN–07NOV01
1-Bearing Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG1347-1 1
Used to support gauge wheel when pressing in new

bearing.
A48245
2-Bearing Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG1347-2
Used to press in new bearing.
3-Bearing Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JDG1347-3
Used to support gauge wheel and receive pressed out

bearing.
MAXEMERGE is a trademark of Deere & Company KC01776,00014A2 –19–20DEC02–2/2
Other Material
Number Name Use
PM38654 (U.S.) Thread Lock and Sealer (High Used during installation of gauge
PM38623 (Canadian) Strength) wheel bearing to achieve proper
271 (LOCTITE) retention between bearing and
bushing.
KC01776,00014A3 –19–11AUG05–1/1

012606
PN=165
Seed Openers
Specifications
Blade Edge Contact Area Blade Edge Contact Length 38—63.5 mm

(1.5—2.5 in.)
Minimum Diameter Diameter 356 mm

(14 in.)
Blade Assembly Nut Torque 122 N•m

(90 lb-ft)
Gauge Wheel to Disk Blade Distance 1.5 mm

(1/16 in.)
30
20
2
KC01776,00014A4 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=166
Seed Openers
30
20
3

012606
PN=167
Seed Openers
TRU-VEE Double Disk Opener Exploded View
11
10
10
12
5
2
4 6
7
2
30 8 14
20 17
4 14
13
3 16
8
2
1
15 19
14 25
9
20
18 21
37
22
44
36
23
43 24
39
38 26
27
35 29
41 40 28
30
34
33
32
42 31
–UN–07NOV01
A48246
(S.N. —710100)
Continued on next page OUO6089,00000E0 –19–17JUN05–1/3

012606
PN=168
Seed Openers
1—Bushing 13—Stop 24—Set Screw 35—Shim (As required)

2—Washer (6 used) 14—Snap Ring (3 used) 25—Arm 36—Guide
3—Cap Screw (2 used) 15—Washer 26—Disk Assembly 37—Runner
4—Bushing (3 used) 16—Spring 27—Ball Bearing 38—Guard
5—Cap Screw (2 used) 17—Groove Pin 28—Lock Washer 39—Pin (2 used)
6—Cover 18—Cap Screw (2 used) 29—Housing 40—Guard
7—Bushing (2 used) 19—Lubrication Fitting 30—Plug 41—Tube
8—Lock Nut (4 used) 20—Self Aligning Bushing 31—Nut 42—Insert
9—Shank 21—Washer 32—Washer 43—Shield
10—Cap Screw (2 used) 22—Cap Screw 33—Rivet 44—Cap Screw and Nut (2
11—Handle 23—Nut 34—Disk each, used)
12—Cover
Left-hand disk is shown.
30
20
5
Continued on next page OUO6089,00000E0 –19–17JUN05–2/3

012606
PN=169
Seed Openers
12
11 13
10 14
6
9
19
2
3
29
4 17
15
5 8
1 4
2 8 18
30 5
20 25
6 20
5
3
2
0 16
19
23
3
2
1
24
21
30
–UN–16JUN05
31
26 27
A56496
22 28
XP Units (S.N. 710101—)
1—Cap Screw 9—Cap Screw 17—Lubrication Fitting 25—Nut (2 used)

2—Washer 10—Rocker 18—Self-Aligning Bushing 26—Round Head Bolt (2 used)
3—Bushing 11—Snap Ring 19—Cap Screw 27—Nut
4—Bushing 12—Spring 20—Cap Screw 28—Cap
5—Nut 13—Handle 21—Cap Screw 29—Shank
6—Cap Screw 14—Stop 22—Disk 30—Seed Tube Guard
7—Bushing 15—Pin 23—Washers 31—Shield
8—Snap Ring 16—Gauge Wheel Arm 24—Washers
OUO6089,00000E0 –19–17JUN05–3/3

012606
PN=170
Seed Openers
PRO-SERIES Double Disk Opener Exploded View
12
11 13
10 14
6
9
19
2
3
29 7
2 17
15
4 5 8 30
4 20
1 2
2 8 18 7
5
26
20
5
23
3
2
0 16
19
24
3
2
1
25
21
30
31 –UN–16JUN05
32 27
A56495
22 28
1—Cap Screw 9—Cap Screw 17—Lubrication Fitting 25—Washer

2—Washer 10—Rocker 18—Self-Aligning Bushing 26—Nut (2 used)
3—Bushing 11—Snap Ring 19—Cap Screw 27—Nut
4—Bushing 12—Spring 20—Cap Screw 28—Cap
5—Nut 13—Handle 21—Cap Screw 29—Shank
6—Cap 14—Stop 22—Disk 30—Seed Tube Guard
7—Spacer Plate 15—Pin 23—Bushing 31—Shield
8—Snap Ring 16—Gauge Wheel Arm 24—Washers 32—Round Head Bolt (2 used)
OUO1073,0001F1F –19–17JUN05–1/1

012606
PN=171
Seed Openers
Inspect and Adjust Seed Opener Blades
1. Remove seed hopper or seed meter (PRO-SERIES

Row Unit) from row unit.
2. Check that gauge wheel tires just touch blades, but still
–UN–29OCT03
turn with minimal resistance, or are no more than 1.5
mm (0.06 in.) away from blades at closest point.
3. Remove cap screw (A), pivot shaft (B), and gauge
A53247
wheel from row unit.
4. Inspect scrapers (C) for excessive wear and replace as

necessary. (See REPLACE SCRAPERS in this group.)
30 CAUTION: Disk blades are sharp. Wear

20 protective gloves and handle disks carefully to
8
avoid being injured.
–UN–29OCT03
5. Inspect blades for damage.
NOTE: If diameter is below specification or if beveled

edge is worn off, replace blades. (See REPLACE
A53246
SEED OPENER BLADES in this group.)
6. Measure blade diameter for specification.
Specification
Opener Blades—Minimum
Diameter ........................................................................................ 356 mm
(14 in.)
7. Check blade edge contact at point (D), using the
–UN–29OCT03
following instructions:
• Using two small business cards, verify blade edge
A53250
contact area.
• Slide business cards between blades until they are
at each end of blade contact area.
• Measure distance between the two business cards A—Cap Screw
and ensure blade edge contact is at specification. B—Pivot Shaft
C—Scraper
D—Contact Point
Specification
Blade Edge Contact—Blade Edge
Contact Length ..................................................................... 38—63.5 mm
(1.5—2.5 in.)

012606
PN=172
Seed Openers
NOTE: Nut on left-hand side of opener has left-hand

threads.
8. If contact area requires adjustment, remove nut (A),

washer, and disk (B).
–UN–20NOV02
NOTE: It is not necessary to have the same number of
shims on each side of shank. Contact area may
be adjusted by relocating shims on one opener
blade. It is not necessary to remove both opener
A51112
blades to adjust contact area.
9. Adjust opener blade contact by relocating spacing

shims between blades and shank on spindle as A—Nut
needed. Retain any shims that have been removed B—Disk
from between blade and shank by moving them to the
30
outside of blade. 20
9
10. Assemble in reverse order using the following special
instructions:
• Install disk, washer, and nut. Tighten nut to

specification.
Specification
Blade Assembly Nut—Torque ...................................................... 122 N•m
(90 lb-ft)
• Install gauge wheel, pivot shaft, and cap screw.

Tighten cap screw to specification.
Specification
Gauge Wheel Pivot Arm Cap
Screw—Torque ............................................................................. 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
• Adjust gauge wheels. (See ADJUST GAUGE

WHEELS in this group.)
OUO6089,0000521 –19–25JAN06–2/2

012606
PN=173
Seed Openers
Replace Seed Opener Blades and Seed Tube

Guard
NOTE: Left-hand side shown. Right-hand side similar.
1. Remove cap screw (A), pivot shaft (B), and gauge

wheel from row unit.
A—Cap Screw
B—Pivot Shaft
–UN–20NOV02
A51094
30
20
10
OUO1073,0001F1C –19–08AUG05–1/5
2. Planting unit equipped with rotary scraper—Pull front

engagement pin (A) outward, disengage scraper
assembly (B) from shank panels.
3. Remove hub cap (C).
–UN–11NOV02
A—Engagement Pin
B—Scraper
C—Hub Cap
A51073
OUO1073,0001F1C –19–08AUG05–2/5
CAUTION: Disk blades are sharp. Wear

protective gloves and handle disks carefully to
avoid being injured.
NOTE: Nut on left-hand side of opener has left-hand

threads.
–UN–20NOV02
4. Remove nut and washer (A).
5. Remove disk (B).

A51112
A—Nut and Washer

B—Disk
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001F1C –19–08AUG05–3/5

012606
PN=174
Seed Openers
NOTE: Steps 6—10 are for non-XP row units. If equipped

with XP row units proceed to step 11.
6. Remove hardened washers (A).
7. Remove disk (B) on opposite side of row unit.
–UN–20NOV02
NOTE: Replace seed tube guard if excessively worn.
8. Replace seed tube guard by removing pins (C) and
A51081
guard.
9. Inspect and replace seed opener disk as necessary.

A—Hardened Washer (6 used)
10. Install in reverse order using the following B—Disk
C—Pin (2 used)
instructions:
30
20
• Install blade assembly nut and tighten to 11
specification.
Specification
Blade Assembly Nut—Torque ...................................................... 122 N•m
(90 lb-ft)
• Adjust blade edge contact. (See INSPECT AND

ADJUST SEED OPENER BLADES in this group.)
• Tighten pivot shaft cap screw to specification.
Specification
Screw—Torque ............................................................................. 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
Continued on next page OUO1073,0001F1C –19–08AUG05–4/5

012606
PN=175
Seed Openers
NOTE: Replace seed tube guard if excessively worn.
NOTE: Steps 11—13 are for XP row units.
11. Replace seed tube guard (A) by rotating clockwise

and sliding forward.
–UN–29JUN05
12. Inspect and replace seed opener disk as necessary.
13. Install in reverse order using the following
A56479
instructions:
• Install blade assembly nut and tighten to

specification. A—Seed Tube Guard
B—Seed Tube
Specification
30 Blade Assembly Nut—Torque ...................................................... 122 N•m
20 (90 lb-ft)
12
• Adjust blade edge contact. (See INSPECT AND

ADJUST SEED OPENER BLADES in this group.)
• Tighten pivot shaft cap screw to specification.
Specification
Screw—Torque ............................................................................. 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
OUO1073,0001F1C –19–08AUG05–5/5

012606
PN=176
Seed Openers
Gauge Wheels—Exploded View (S.N. —710100)
30
20
13
–UN–30NOV99
A43765
A—Handle G—Snap Ring M—Lube Fitting S—Wheel
B—Bolt H—Stop N—Arm T—Tire
C—Shank Cover I—Snap Ring O—Washer U—Ball Bearing
D—Bolt J—Groove Pin P—Washer V—Bushing
E—Spring K—Screw Q—Cap Screw W—Cap Screw and Lock Nut
F—Washer L—Washer R—Pin
NOTE: Left-hand gauge wheel shown. 2. Apply grease to bearing (U) and bushing (V) and
assemble wheel.
1. Disassemble gauge wheel assembly, inspect parts
for wear or damage and replace as necessary.
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CE1 –19–09AUG05–1/2

012606
PN=177
Seed Openers
3. Tighten outer cap screws on wheel; then three 4. Adjust gauge wheel position. (See ADJUST
inner cap screws. GAUGE WHEEL in this group.)
OUO6046,0001CE1 –19–09AUG05–2/2
30
20
14

012606
PN=178
Seed Openers
Gauge Wheels—Exploded View (S.N. 710101— )
B
C
B
D
E
F 30
G 20
H 15
J
K
I
R
L
U
T
S N
M
O
–UN–12JAN04
Q
A53254
A—Handle G—Washer L—Tire Q—Cap Screw (3 used)
B—Snap Ring (2 used) H—Pivot Shaft Cap Screw M—Bearing R—Stop
C—Groove Pin I—Washer N—Wheel S—Snap Ring
D—Lubrication Fitting J—Nut (11 used) O—Cap Screw (8 used) T—Washer
E—Arm K—Wheel P—Cap Screw U—Spring
F—Self Adjusting Bushing
NOTE: Left-hand gauge wheel shown. 3. Tighten outer cap screws (O) on wheel; then three
inner cap screws (Q).
1. Disassemble gauge wheel assembly, inspect parts
for wear or damage and replace as necessary. 4. Install gauge wheel assembly using the following
specifications.
2. Apply grease to bearing (M) and assemble wheel.

012606
PN=179
Seed Openers
Specification 5. Adjust gauge wheel position. (See ADJUST

Gauge Wheel Pivot Arm Cap GAUGE WHEELS in this group.)
Screw—Torque ...................................................................... 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
Gauge Wheel Mounting Cap
Screw—Torque ...................................................................... 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
OUO6046,0001CE2 –19–09AUG05–2/2
Gauge Wheel Bearing Replacement (S.N. —

30 710100)
20
16
IMPORTANT: This is only to be used on steel/plastic
gauge wheels. DO NOT use on
steel/steel gauge wheels. Damage to the
gauge wheel will result.
1. Bearing Removal:
–UN–02SEP99
a. Place JDG1347-3, Bearing Receiver Tool (A), on
steel plate (B).
b. Center steel plate directly under press (C).
A43579
c. Center plastic half of gauge wheel assembly on
bearing receiver tool, with bolt HEADS (D) facing
A—Bearing Receiver Tool
down.
B—Steel Plate
C—Press
NOTE: Bearing receiver tool will rest center bore in D—Wheel Bolt Heads
plastic half of gauge wheel.

012606
PN=180
Seed Openers
d. Lower hydraulic press onto top of gauge wheel ball

bearing shaft (A). Apply pressure until ball bearing
is forced completely free of press wheel assembly.
A—Ball Bearing Shaft
–UN–02SEP99
A43580
30
20
17
OUO6046,0001CE3 –19–11AUG05–2/4
2. Bearing Installation:
a. Place tool JDG1347-1, Bearing Press Support Tool

(A), on steel plate (B) resting on bottom rung of
hydraulic press.
b. Center steel plate directly under press (C).
c. Center metal half of gauge wheel assembly on

bearing press support tool, with bolt HEADS facing
–UN–02SEP99
up.
NOTE: Bearing press support tool will rest center bore in

metal half of gauge wheel.
A43581
A—Bearing Press Support Tool
B—Steel Plate
C—Press
D—Wheel Bolt Nuts

012606
PN=181
Seed Openers
d. Apply PM38654 Thread Lock and Sealer (High

Strength) to new ball bearing (A); then insert into
wheel hub center with bearing shaft facing down.
e. Place tool JDG1347-2, Bearing Press Plate Tool

(B), on top of new ball bearing.
f. Lower hydraulic press onto bearing press plate tool.
g. Apply pressure until bearing press plate tool
–UN–02SEP99
bottoms out in plastic half of gauge wheel’s
counterbore.
A—New Ball Bearing
A43582
B—Bearing Press Plate Tool
30
20
18
OUO6046,0001CE3 –19–11AUG05–4/4

012606
PN=182
Seed Openers
Gauge Wheel Bearing Replacement (S.N. 710101— )
C
B
D
A
F
E
G
30
20
19
–UN–12JAN04
H
A53566
I
A—Washer D—Tire F—Wheel H—Cap Screw

B—Nut (11 used) E—Bearing G—Cap Screw (8 used) I—Cap Screw (3 used)
C—Wheel
1. Disassemble gauge wheel assembly, inspect parts Specification

Gauge Wheel Mounting Cap
for wear or damage and replace as necessary.
Screw—Torque ...................................................................... 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
2. Apply grease to bearing (E) and assemble wheel.
Tighten cap screw (H) to specification.
OUO6046,0001CE4 –19–15JUL05–1/1

012606
PN=183
Seed Openers
Adjust Gauge Wheels
NOTE: When assembled, gauge wheels and disk blades

must be free to turn with minimal resistance.
Adjust gauge wheel to specification using the following

instructions.
Gauge Wheel-to-Disk Blade Distance 1.5 mm

(1/16 in.)
30
20
20
OUO6089,0000382 –19–16DEC02–1/2
1. Loosen cap screw (A) and turn nut (B)

counterclockwise, to move gauge wheel closer to blade
or clockwise, to move gauge wheel away from blade.
2. Tighten cap screw (A) to specification.
Specification
Screw—Torque ............................................................................. 271 N•m
(200 lb-ft)
–UN–20NOV02
A—Cap Screw
B—Nut
A51095
OUO6089,0000382 –19–16DEC02–2/2

012606
PN=184
Seed Openers
Replace Scrapers
B
C
30
20
21
–UN–13NOV03
A53317
A—Rigid Scraper B—Engagement Pin C—Shank D—Edge
Disassemble scraper, inspect parts for wear or

damage and replace as necessary.
OUO6089,000013E –19–19OCT01–1/1

012606
PN=185
Seed Openers
Replace Heavy-Duty Scrapers
C J
H
I
G
D F
30 H
20
22
I
E
–UN–08NOV02
G
A50855
E
A—Round Head Bolt D—Scraper Mount G—Pin (2 used) I—Rods

B—Washers E—Springs H—Pin (2 used) J—Scrapers
C—Nuts F—Spacers
OUO1073,00018A1 –19–01NOV02–1/1

012606
PN=186
Group 25
Closing Wheels
Other Material
Number Name Use
TY6341 (U.S.) Multi-Purpose SD Polyurea Grease Used to lubricate closing wheel

bearings
OUO6089,0000369 –19–20NOV02–1/1
Specifications
30
Item Measurement Specification 25
1
Closing Wheel Cap Screw Torque 196 ± 27 N•m
(145 ± 20 lb-ft)
Closing Wheel Frame Mounting Nuts Torque 37—45 N•m

(50—61 lb-ft)
OUO6089,00003A1 –19–16DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=187
Closing Wheels
Closing Wheels Repair
10
8
7
9
1
2
11
30
25
2
3
15
14
16
12
13
19
17
18
5 6
4 20
2
1 26
4
25
27
23
22 –UN–13NOV03
24
A53256
21
1—Cap Screw 8—Pin 15—Wheel 22—Cap Screw

2—Bushing 9—Bushing 16—Tire 23—Snap Ring
3—Nut 10—Handle 17—Bearing 24—Bearing
4—Cap Screws 11—Closing Wheel Frame 18—Cap Screw (6 used) 25—Bearing
5—Support 12—Nut 19—Wheel 26—Closing Wheel
6—Spring 13—Washer 20—Cap Screw 27—Cast Iron Closing Wheel
7—Cotter Pin 14—Spacer 21—Cap Assembly
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CD4 –19–11AUG05–1/2

012606
PN=188
Closing Wheels
NOTE: Left-hand closing wheel shown. 8. Assemble in reverse order using the following
special instructions:
1. Disconnect spring (6) from support (5) and closing
wheel frame (11). • Tighten cap screws (18) evenly, so wheel
assembly is not loose on bearings.
2. Remove cap screws (4) and support (5). • Tighten cap screws (20 and 22) to specification.
3. Remove cap screws (1), nuts (3), bushings (2) and Specification
closing wheel frame (11). Closing Wheel Cap Screw—
Torque............................................................................ 196 ± 27 N•m
(145 ± 20 lb-ft)
4. Remove cotter pin (7), bushings (9), pin (8) and
handle (10).
NOTE: Left-hand side closing wheel cap screw has • Coat bushings (2 and 9) and bearing (17) with
left-hand threads. TY6341 Multi-Purpose SD Polyurea Grease.
• Tighten nuts (3) to specification. 30
5. Remove nut (12), cap screw (20), washers (13), 25
spacer (14) and closing wheel. Specification 3
Closing Wheel Frame Mounting
6. To disassemble closing wheel, remove cap screws Nuts—Torque.................................................................... 37—45 N•m
(18) and separate closing wheel. (50—61 lb-ft)
7. Inspect all components for wear or damage, replace

as necessary.
OUO6046,0001CD4 –19–11AUG05–2/2
Center Closing Wheels
1. Raise machine and install service locks.
2. Center closing wheels (B) as required using following

instructions:
–UN–24OCT02
• Loosen cap screws (A) and adjust closing wheels (B)

to right or left.
• Tighten cap screws (A).
A50774
A—Cap Screw
B—Closing Wheels
OUO1073,0001885 –19–24OCT02–1/1

012606
PN=189
Closing Wheels
Adjust Closing Wheel Spacing
NOTE: Left-hand side closing wheel cap screw has

left-hand threads.
1. Remove cap screw (A), nut, and spacers (B).
–UN–05NOV02
2. Install closing wheels with spacers (B) located to
outside (for narrow spacing) or to the inside (for wide
spacing).
A50775
3. Tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Closing Wheel Cap Screw—
Torque .................................................................................. 196 ± 27 N•m
30 (145 ± 20 lb-ft)
25
4
B—Spacer
–UN–24OCT02
A50777
Wide Spacing
Narrow Spacing –UN–24OCT02

A50776
OUO1073,0001884 –19–24OCT02–1/1
Stagger Closing Wheels
Remove one closing wheel from planting unit and install in

rear hole (A) of casting.
A—Rear Hole
–UN–28OCT03
A53243
OUO6089,000051F –19–28OCT03–1/1

012606
PN=190
Closing Wheels
Adjust Closing Wheel Down Force
NOTE: Placing handle in middle slot (E) will allow closing

wheels to FLOAT with only the weight of closing
wheel system on soil surface.
–UN–28OCT03
• Place handle in slots (A, B, C and D) to adjust down
force.
A53242
A—Slot A (Minimum)
B—Slot B
C—Slot C
D—Slot D (Maximum)
E—Slot E (Float)
30
25
5
OUO6089,000051ECONV1 –19–28OCT03–1/1

012606
PN=191
Closing Wheels
Disassemble and Assemble Row Cleaner Unit with Tapered Wheels
6
9
5
3
8
4 7
13 6
7
2 14
15 10
8 12 11
7 7
1 10
30
25
6 20
23
–UN–02OCT02
24 22
17
16
18
19
A50507
21
1—Bolt (8 used) 8—Washer (4 used) 14—Nut (2 used) 20—Lubrication Fitting (2

2—Cap (2 used 9—Bracket 15—Lock Washer (2 used) used)
3—Wheel (2 used) 10—Cap Screw (2 used) 16—Shield (2 used) 21—Hub (2 used)
4—Bolt (2 used) 11—Pin 17—Bushing (2 used) 22—Bushing (2 used)
5—Pin 12—Washer 18—Seal (2 used) 23—Ball Bearing (2 used)
6—Cap Screw (4 used) 13—Support 19—Lock Nut (4 used) 24—Washer (2 used)
7—Lock Nut (6 used)
1. Inspect bushings (17 and 22) and bearing (23) for 3. Apply TY6341 Multi-Purpose SD Polyurea Grease
wear. Replace as necessary. to hub at lubrication fitting (20).
2. Adjust height to desired position. (Refer to

Operator’s Manual for settings.)
KC01776,00014B3 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=192
Group 30
Insecticide/Herbicide Meter
Other Material
Number Name Use
TY6350 (U.S.) John Deere Multipurpose Spray Used to lubricate meter drive
Lube assembly.
KC01776,00014B4 –19–20DEC02–1/1
Specifications
30
1
Insecticide/Herbicide Meter setting at Gap 4 mm
“10” (0.160 in.)
V-Notch Opening Width 4 mm

(0.160 in.)
KC01776,00014B5 –19–20DEC02–1/1
Calibrate Insecticide/Herbicide Meter
1. Turn knob on rear of hopper to a setting of "10".
2. Remove hopper and turn it upside down on a flat

surface.
–UN–19DEC95
A38835

012606
PN=193
NOTE: If measurement is to specification, the meter is

calibrated correctly. If measurement is not to
specification, the meter must be recalibrated.
3. Measure the V-notch opening (A) on the meter gate.

The opening should be set to a specified width.
Specification
V-Notch Opening—Width .................................................................. 4 mm
(0.160 in.)
–UN–12NOV02
A—V-Notch Opening
A51098
30
30
2
OUO6089,0000386 –19–20NOV02–2/5
NOTE: Single meter shown. Dual meter similar.
4. Remove cap screws (A) securing meter to hopper;

then remove meter from bottom of hopper.
5. Remove cap screws (B) and gate cover (C).

B—Cap Screw (4 used)
C—Cover
–UN–12NOV02
A51099
–UN–12NOV02
A51101

012606
PN=194
6. Remove entire plastic gate assembly (A) from

aluminum housing.
7. Work knob (B) back and forth while pulling apart to

remove knob from splined nut (C).
–UN–12NOV02
8. Install plastic gate assembly (A) onto aluminum
housing.
9. Turn nut (C) until V-notch opening is to specification.
A51102
Specification
V-Notch Opening—Width .................................................................. 4 mm
(0.160 in.)
A—Plastic Gate Assembly

B—Knob 30
C—Nut 30
3
–UN–13NOV02
A51113
–UN–12NOV02
A51103

012606
PN=195
10. Replace the knob on nut so the number “0” lines up

with the number “1” on cam follower. The meter
should have a setting of “10”.
11. Seat knob to flange on nut.
–UN–13NOV02
12. Install gate cover with cap screws previously
removed.
13. Install meter on bottom of hopper and attach with cap
A51115
screws previously removed.
30
30
4
OUO6089,0000386 –19–20NOV02–5/5
Insecticide/Herbicide Meter Drive Alignment
IMPORTANT: Proper alignment of meter drive is

essential for proper operation.
Following procedure is for diagnosis and repair of
–UN–12NOV98
misalignment.
1. Remove meter drive sprocket. Check to see if shaft,

sprocket mounting plate or any part of assembly is
A43021
bent. Replace any parts if damaged.
NOTE: Washer will strengthen sprocket drive plate and

help prevent bending. A—Washer
2. Add a 8.74 x 35 x 3.4 mm (11/32 x 1-3/8 x 0.134 in.)

washer (A) under attaching bolt flange nut (closest to
sprocket centerline).
3. Center sprocket in side panel hole and tighten

hardware.
Continued on next page KC01776,00014B7 –19–20DEC02–1/2

012606
PN=196
4. Inspect meter drive coupler (A) and cotter pin (B) for
wear. Replace parts as needed.
NOTE: Washers (24H1369) have a closer fit to hex shaft

and should decrease uneven wear of cotter pin.
5. Replace washers (E and F) with washers (24H1369).
NOTE: When dual meters are used; check alignment of

two shafts with respect to each other.
6. Rotate coupler. Drive should rotate smoothly without

binding.
7. Lubricate meter drive assembly between coupler (A),

washers (C, E and F) and outer bearings (D); using
30
TY6350 John Deere Multipurpose Spray Lube or 30
equivalent.
–UN–12NOV98
5
8. Install chemical hopper to row unit; with drive chain

removed from sprocket, engage drive and rotate. Drive
should now turn freely.
A43022
NOTE: If chain can be shortened by a link, do so at this
time. Idler tension will be increased. A—Coupler
B—Cotter Pin
9. Install drive chain. C—Washer
D—Bearing
E—Washer
NOTE: Once drives are aligned, chemical hoppers should F—Washer
not be moved from row to row.
KC01776,00014B7 –19–20DEC02–2/2

012606
PN=197
30
30
6

012606
PN=198
Group 35
Coulter
Other Material
Number Name Use
TY24416 (U.S.) Multi-Purpose HD Lithium Complex Used to grease anti-friction bearing.
KC01776,00014B8 –19–20DEC02–1/1
Specifications
30
1
Coulter Bearing Drag 1.3—2.8 N•m
(10—25 lb-in.)
KC01776,00014B9 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=199
Coulter
Adjust Coulter Bearing
NOTE: Anti-friction bearing has a face-type seal. Contact

of seal against a machined surface retains grease
and excludes dirt. Unless bearing is in proper
adjustment, seal is ineffective.
1. Clamp coulter blade (C) in vise.
2. Remove cotter pin (A) and slotted nut (B).
3. Remove bearing.
–UN–13OCT88
4. Inspect seal (D) for leakage or damage, replace if
necessary.
30
A22350
35 NOTE: Do not use chassis lubricant in anti-friction
2 bearings.
5. Clean bearing and repack, using TY24416 A—Cotter Pin

B—Slotted Nut
Multi-Purpose HD Lithium Complex or an equivalent
C—Coulter Blade
SAE multipurpose-type grease. D—Face Seal
E—Hub Cap
6. Install bearing.
7. Tighten slotted nut (B) to specification.
Specification
Spindle Nut Bearing—Torque ................................................. 1.3-2.8 N•m
(10—25 lb-in.)
8. Replace cotter pin (A) into slotted nut (B) to lock in

position.
KC01776,00014BA –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=200
Group 40
Down Force Springs
Specifications
M10 Heavy-Duty Down force Torque 54 N•m

Mounting Nuts (40 lb-ft)
M16 Heavy Duty Down Force Torque 102 N•m

Mounting Nut (75 lb-ft)
Heavy-Duty Down Force Spring Torque 41 N•m

Retaining Nut (30 lb-ft)
30
40
1
OUO6046,0001CE6 –19–15NOV04–1/1
Down Force Springs-Light Duty Non-Adjustable
–UN–19SEP02
A50327
A—Cap Screw (4 used) B—Spacer (4 used) C—Spring (2 used) D—Nut (4 used)
Use as a guide when repairing or replacing

non-adjustable down force springs.
KC01776,00014BC –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=201
Down Force Springs
Down Force Springs-Double, Light Duty Non-Adjustable
30
40
2
–UN–19SEP02
A50328
A—Cap Screw (8 used) C—Spring (4 used) E—Spacer (4 used) G—Washer (4 used)
B—Spacer (8 used) D—Nut (8 used) F—Spring (4 used)
Use as a guide when repairing or replacing double

non-adjustable down force springs.
KC01776,00014BD –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=202
Down Force Springs
Remove and Install Heavy-Duty Down Force

Spring Assembly
1. Raise planter until row units are off of ground.
2. Relieve down force pressure by moving lever (A) fully
–UN–12APR01
forward into notch (B).
3. Lower planter to ground and place tractor in “PARK”.

A47325
4. Remove row unit. (See procedure in this section.)
A—Down Force Adjustment Lever

B—Notch (Zero Down Force Pressure) B
30
40
3
–UN–24SEP02
A50361
OUO6046,0001CE5 –19–15NOV04–1/3
5. Remove nuts (A) and washers, nut (B), and down force
spring assembly (C).
6. Inspect down force spring assembly, repair or replace

as necessary.
–UN–24SEP02
7. Install down force springs using following special
instructions.
• Tighten nuts (A) to specification.
A50364
Specification
M10 Heavy-Duty Down force
Mounting Nuts—Torque ................................................................. 54 N•m A—Nuts
(40 lb-ft) B—Nut
C—Down Force Spring Assembly
• Tighten nut (B) to specification.
Specification
M16 Heavy Duty Down Force
Mounting Nut—Torque ................................................................. 102 N•m
(75 lb-ft)
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001CE5 –19–15NOV04–2/3

012606
PN=203
Down Force Springs
• Raise machine and adjust down force to desired

setting by placing lever (A) in corresponding notch.
A—Down Force Adjustment Lever

B—Notch Zero Down Force
C—Notch— 57 kg (125 lb) of Down Force
D—Notch— 113 kg (250 lb) of Down Force
–UN–12APR01
E—Notch— 181 kg (400 lb) of Down Force
A47325
C
30 D
B E
40
4
–UN–11APR01
A47306
OUO6046,0001CE5 –19–15NOV04–3/3

012606
PN=204
Down Force Springs
30
40
5

012606
PN=205
Down Force Springs
Repair Heavy-Duty Down Force Spring Assembly
B C
30
40 G F
6 E
L M
I
O
N
–UN–24SEP02
P
A50338
Continued on next page KC01776,00014BF –19–20DEC02–1/2

012606
PN=206
Down Force Springs
A—Lever E—Washer I—Spring M—Lower Spring Mount

B—Nut (2 used) F—Nut (2 used) J—Cap Screw N—Pin
C—Cap Screw (2 used) G—Upper Spring Mount K—Spring (2 used) O—Washer
D—Arm H—Nut L—Spacer P—Cap Screw
1. Remove down force spring assembly. (See 6. Assemble in reverse order using the following
procedure in this group.) special instructions.
2. Remove spring (I), pin (N), and lever (A). • Tighten nuts (B) to specification.
3. Remove arm (D). Specification

Heavy-Duty Down Force Spring
Retaining Nut—Torque ............................................................ 41 N•m
4. Remove cap screw (P), washer (O), and nut (B) (30 lb-ft)
from each spring.
5. Remove lower spring mount (M), down force

springs (K), and spacers (L). 30
40
7
KC01776,00014BF –19–20DEC02–2/2

012606
PN=207
Down Force Springs
30
40
8

012606
PN=208
Section 35
Hitch and Frame
Contents
Page
Group 05—Repair and Welding

Frame Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-1
Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-2
Emergency Crack Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-3
Emergency "T" Joint Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-3
Skip Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-4
Stress Relief (Normalizing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-4
35

012606
PN=1
Contents
35

012606
PN=2
Group 05
Repair and Welding
Frame Repair
Correct damage to a machine frame by replacing the

damaged part with a new one, ordered from the parts
catalog.
This new part is made according to the factory

specifications so the strength and alignment is like the
original part.
Some parts of machine frames are made of a treated

steel for added strength. Heating or welding of these
steels can weaken the frame.
A repair of inadequate strength can result in a portion of

the machine breaking loose damaging another portion of
the machine or the tractor and causing possible injury to
the operator.
35
05
1
KC01776,0001483 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=211
Repair and Welding
Welding
CAUTION: When welding, always follow all

safety precautions. Avoid fire by removing all
flammable materials. When absolutely not
possible, shield the flammable material; then,
always post a fire guard with an adequate
extinguisher.
Completely lower planter, before welding.
Avoid potentially toxic fumes or dust.

Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint
is heated. Remove paint before welding.
When sanding or grinding paint, avoid

breathing the dust by wearing an approved
respirator.
If a paint stripper or solvent was used, remove

it with soap and water. Remove the material
35
05 containers from the area and allow fumes to
2 disperse.
Work outside or in a well ventilated area.
IMPORTANT: When welding near electronic

components such as the planter
monitor (wedgebox), unplug all
connectors and remove the controller
box(es) from the planter to prevent
possible damage to the
microprocessors within the box(es).
KC01776,0001484 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=212
Repair and Welding
Emergency Crack Repair
When emergency repairs must be made, first, straighten

the affected area. If the area must be heated, use the
minimum heating possible to avoid changing the frame
metal characteristics. Measure diagonally across the
frame to be sure the frame is square. The frame should
–UN–07SEP99
also be level and all members straight.
If there is a crack, drill a stop hole (A) at the end of the
A43589
crack (B). If heating shows that the crack has extended
beyond the stop hole, drill another stop hole at the end of
the crack. The stop hole diameter should be
approximately as large as the thickness of the metal. If A—Stop Hole
the wall thickness is over 6 mm (0.25 in), cut a "V" groove B—Crack
in the crack before welding it. A mild steel welding rod is
usually a good choice.
35
05
3
KC01776,0001485 –19–20DEC02–1/1
Emergency “T” Joint Repair
If the frame is damaged near a "T" joint, form a gusset

around the frame. When possible, the gusset should have
the same wall thickness as the frame and should extend
beyond the joint as far as the member is wide. For
example if the frame of 102 mm (4 in.) square tubing, the
–UN–07SEP99
gusset should extend out 102 mm (4 in.) from the point of
intersection. Modify the gusset if there are nearby
machine components or tools.
A43590
KC01776,0001486 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=213
Repair and Welding
Skip Welding
When the frame is damaged away from a joint, wrap a

gusset (A) around the damaged area. When possible,
extend the gusset beyond the damaged area three times
as far as the member is wide.
–UN–07SEP99
When welding the gusset in place, use a skip welding
technique (B). Usually a weld of 50 mm (2 in.) length with
a skipped or non-welded area of 50 mm (2 in.) will be
A43591
adequate. A continuous bead can seriously affect any
heat-treatment of the original metal. A continuous weld
bead will often leave stresses in the metal that cause
repair failure. A—Gusset
B—Skip Welding
KC01776,0001487 –19–20DEC02–1/1
35
05
Stress Relief (Normalizing)
4
Stresses may be relieved by normalizing. Reheat the
entire weld area and allow it to cool slowly. Bring mild
steels to a dark cherry color, this is approximately 594 to
690° C (1100 to 1200° F). Alloy steels are brought to
approximately 872° C (1600° F).
KC01776,0001488 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=214
Section 50
Drives
Contents
Page
Group 05—Specifications
Drive Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-05-1
Shear Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-05-1
Sprockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-05-2
Group 10—Drive Wheels

Transmission Drive Wheel Exploded View . . . .50-10-1
Group 20—Seed Drive Transmission

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-1
Seed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-2
Remove and Install Seed Transmission . . . . . .50-20-3
Disassemble and Assemble Seed
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-4
Adjust Seed Transmission Wheel
Engagement Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-22
Group 30—Drillshaft
50
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-30-1
Remove and Install Wing Frame Drillshaft. . . . .50-30-1
Remove and Install Center Frame Drillshaft . . .50-30-4
Remove and Install Upper Drillshaft . . . . . . . . .50-30-4
Aligning Drillshaft Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-30-6
Group 40—Half-Width Disconnect

Remove and Install Half-Width Disconnect . . . .50-40-1
Group 45—Variable Rate Drive

Variable Rate Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-45-1

012606
PN=1
Contents
50

012606
PN=2
Group 05
Specifications
Drive Chains Specifications
SEED DRIVE: Description Number of Links Type

Seed Drive Tire-to-Transmission Single pitch roller chain 104 links ANSI 40
Drive
Transmission Driven Single pitch roller chain 128 links ANSI 40
Shaft-to-Countershaft
Transmission Driver Single pitch roller chain 115 links ANSI 40
Sprockets-to-Driven Sprockets
Jackshaft-to-Drillshaft Single pitch roller chain 66 links ANSI 41
Center Drillshaft-to-Wing Single pitch roller chain 66 links ANSI 41
Drillshaft
Clutchshaft-to-Jackshaft Single pitch roller chain 94 links ANSI 40
KC01776,00014C7 –19–18NOV04–1/1
Shear Pin Specifications

DRILLSHAFT COUPLER Cotter Pin, 5 x 50 mm
JACKSHAFT SPROCKET Cotter Pin, 5 x 50 mm
SEED DRIVE TIRE SPROCKET Cotter Pin, 6.300 x 50 mm
50
UNIT DRIVE SPROCKET Cotter Pin, 3.2 x 32 mm (Vacuum) Spring Locking Pin, 2.67 x 33 mm (Finger
05
Pick up)
1
KC01776,00014C8 –19–26JAN06–1/1

012606
PN=217
Specifications
Sprocket Specifications
Sprocket Type Number of Teeth Type Chain Used

MAIN DRIVE:
Wheel Steel, single pitch 18 and 36 ANSI 40
Transmission Input Shaft- Steel, single pitch 18, 36 and 48 ANSI 40
(Hi-Low) driven
Transmission Input Shaft driver Steel, single pitch 16, 20, 24, 29 and 35 ANSI 40
Transmission Output Shaft driven Steel, single pitch 24, 25, 26, 27 and 28 ANSI 40
Transmission Output Shaft driver Steel, single pitch 20 ANSI 50
Countershaft- (driven before Steel, single pitch 27 ANSI 50
clutches )
Countershaft- (driver before Steel, single pitch 20 ANSI 50
clutches )
Clutchshaft- (between each Steel, single pitch 20 ANSI 50
clutch driven)
Clutch Powder metal, single pitch 21 ANSI 40
Jackshaft- (drive to drillshaft Steel, single pitch 21 ANSI 41
driven)
Jackshaft (driver) Steel, single pitch 16 ANSI 40
DrillShaft Steel, single pitch 19 ANSI 40
Seed Meter (vacuum) Powder metal 28 ANSI 41
Seed Meter (other) Powder metal 19 ANSI 41
50
05
2
KC01776,00014C9 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=218
Group 10
Drive Wheels
Transmission Drive Wheel Exploded View
M
D
A
F
C
G
I
–UN–23MAY02
K
H
J L
A48077
A—Cotter Pin E—Bearing H—Rim K—Washer
B—Bushing F—Axle Shaft I— Wheel Axle L—Cotter Pin
C—Sprocket G—Wheel Bolt (5 used) J—Nut (5 used) M—Spacer 50
D—Washer 10
1
Use as a guide when disassembling and assembling.
KC01776,00014CA –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=219
Drive Wheels
50
10
2

012606
PN=220
Group 20
Seed Drive Transmission
Specifications
Seed Transmission Wheel Dimension 200 mm

Engagement Point (7-57/64 in.)
KC01776,00014CB –19–20DEC02–1/1
50
20
1

012606
PN=221
Seed Transmission
A43624 –UN–17SEP99
54 53 55
60 41
40
44
52 56
57 67
56
42
41
56 40
57
9 56 59
58 66
39
62
7 8 65
47 61
10 35
18 27
46
11 27 45
12
13
18
14 35 51
5
46
5 19 59
4 5 17
3 10
15
2 7
22 20 63
27
14 21 64
28 34
27 16 23
36
32 3
33
64 48 8
3 11
49
24
29 25
35 26
5
4
3 6
29
2
31 27
28
1 27
40
30 42
31
40
41
43 27
44 28
38
39 27
37
KC01776,00014CC –19–20DEC02–1/2

012606
PN=222
1—Roller Chain 20—Catch 37—Cap Screw, M8 x 45 51—Cap Screw

2—Lock Nut, M12 (2 used) 21—Cap Screw, Nut, Washer 38—Nut, M8 52—Wheel Bolt, Nut (5 used)
3—Chain Sprocket (4 used) 22—Spacer (2 used) 39—Clamp 53—Rim
4—Spacer (2 used) 23—Spacer (2 used) 40—Nut, M10 (6 used) (if 54—Tire Valve Stem
5—Washer (4 used) 24—Roller Chain installed) 55—Axle
6—Panel 25—Cotter Pin 41—Spacer (4 used) (if 56—Pressed Flanged Housing
7—Cotter Pin (2 used) 26—Shaft installed) (4 used)
8—Shaft 27—Pressed Flanged Housing 42—Adjusting Strap (2 used) 57—Ball Bearing (2 used)
9—Cotter Pin (4 used) (8 used) (if installed) 58—Bolt, Nut (6 used)
10—Spacer (3 used) 28—Ball Bearing (4 used) 43—Clutch (if installed) 59—Plate (2 used)
11—Spacer (8 used) 29—Cap Screw, Nut (4 used) 44—U-Bolt (2 used) (if 60—Cap Screw, Nut (2 used)
12—Chain Sprocket 30—Chain Sprocket installed) 61—Chain Sprocket
13—Shaft 31—Lock Pin (2 used) 45—Lock Nut, M16 62—Cotter Pin (2 used)
14—Cap Screw (2 used) 32—Chain Sprocket 46—Washer (2 used) 63—Torsion Spring (RH)
15—Clip 33—Chain Sprocket (2 used) 47—Tube 64—Ball Bearing (2 used)
16—Bolt, M6 x 12 34—Chain Sprocket 48—Support 65—Cap Screw
17—Spring (combination) 49—Torsion Spring (LH) 66—Nut
18—Arm 35—Bolt, Nut (15 used) 50—Cap Screw, Nut (2 used) 67—Clutch (4 used)
19—Spring 36—Sign
Use as a guide when disassembling and assembling disconnect clutches. Left-hand transmission is mirror
seed transmission. image of right-hand.
Two transmissions are used on each planter, and each

transmission is equipped with two half-width
KC01776,00014CC –19–20DEC02–2/2
50
20
3
Remove and Install Seed Transmission
1. Park machine on a flat level surface.
2. Disconnect half-width disconnect clutch connector (A)

from both sides.
–UN–30SEP02
A—Connector (2 used)
A50365
Continued on next page KC01776,00014CD –19–20DEC02–1/2

012606
PN=223
3. Loosen chain idlers (B) on both sides.
4. Remove master link and drive chains (A).
5. Remove drive drillshafts from transmission. (See

procedure in this group.)
–UN–25SEP02
6. Attach a suitable lifting device to seed transmission,
remove cap screws (C) and seed transmission from
planter.
A50362
7. Repair seed transmission as needed. (See procedure
in this group.)
8. Install seed transmission in reverse order.
A—Drive Chain (2 used)

B—Idler (2 used)
C—Cap Screw (2 used)
–UN–25SEP02
A50363
KC01776,00014CD –19–20DEC02–2/2
50
20
4
Disassemble and Assemble Seed
Transmission
1. Remove roller chains as necessary.
2. Remove two nuts (A), if equipped.
A—Nut (2 used)
–UN–18DEC97
A44095
Continued on next page KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–1/55

012606
PN=224
NOTE: Mark left-hand or right-hand clutch for installation.

Left and right clutches are not interchangeable.
(See clutch identification plate. CW on
identification plate indicates a left-hand clutch,
CCW on identification plate indicates a right-hand
clutch.)
–UN–18DEC97
3. Mark clutch. Remove parts (A—E), if equipped.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for opposite side, if equipped.
A44094
A—Nut, M10, (2 used)
B—Spacer (2 used)
C—Adjusting Strap
D—U-Bolt
E—Clutch
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–2/55
5. Remove two nuts (A).
A—Nut (2 used)
50
–UN–18DEC97
20
5
A44093
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–3/55
A—Chain Sprocket, 12 Tooth (2 used)

B—Spacer (2 used)
C—Washer (4 used)
D—Cap Screw, M12 x 55, (2 used)
–UN–18DEC97
A44092

012606
PN=225
7. Remove two quick lock pins (A).
A—Quick Lock Pins
–UN–18DEC97
A44091
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–5/55
A—Chain Sprocket, 36 Tooth (2 used)

B—Chain Sprocket, 18 Tooth
C—Chain Sprocket, 48 Tooth
–UN–18DEC97
50
20
6
A44090
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–6/55
9. Mark shafts (A) and (C) for cotter pin hole locations for
installation. Remove three cotter pins (B).
10. Remove shaft (A).
A—Shaft
C—Shaft
–UN–29DEC97
A44089

012606
PN=226
11. Remove cotter pin (A).
A—Cotter Pin
–UN–18DEC97
A44088
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–8/55
A—Shaft
B—Chain Sprocket
C—Spacer (4 used)
50
–UN–18DEC97
20
7
A44087
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–9/55
13. Mark shaft (A) and clamp (B) for installation. Remove
clamp (B).
A—Shaft
B—Clamp
–UN–18DEC97
A44086

012606
PN=227
A—Chain Sprocket
B—Spacer (4 used)
C—Shaft
–UN–18DEC97
A44085
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–11/55
15. Mark shaft (A) and clamp (B) for installation. Remove
clamp (B).
A—Shaft
B—Clamp
–UN–18DEC97
A44084
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–12/55
50
20
8
CAUTION: Support is under spring tension.
16. Remove bolt and nut (A) to relieve springs (B).
A—Bolt and Nut
–UN–18DEC97
B—Springs
A44083
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–13/55
17. Remove two bolts and nuts (A).
A—Bolts and Nuts

–UN–18DEC97
A44082

012606
PN=228
18. Remove tube (A).
A—Tube
–UN–18DEC97
A44081
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–15/55
19. Remove cotter pin (A) and three nuts and bolts (B).
A—Cotter Pin
B—Nuts and Bolts
–UN–18DEC97
A44080
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–16/55
50
20
9
A—Pressed Flange Housing (2 used)

B—Ball Bearing
C—Plate
D—Torsion Spring
–UN–18DEC97
A44079

012606
PN=229
A—Torsion Spring
B—Support
C—Ball Bearing (2 used)
–UN–18DEC97
A44078
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–18/55
22. Remove parts (A—E).
A—Wheel Assembly
B—Axle
C—Cotter Pin
50 D—Nut, 9/16 in., (5 used)
–UN–18DEC97
20 E—Wheel Bolt, 9/16 in., (5 used)
10
A44077
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–19/55
CAUTION: Arm is under spring tension. Use

catch to support arm during disassembly.
23. Attach catch (B) to arm (A). Remove cap screw and
nut (C).
–UN–18DEC97
A—Arm
B—Catch
C—Cap Screw and Nut
A44076

012606
PN=230
24. Remove two spacers (A) and chain sprocket (B).
A—Spacers
B—Sprocket
–UN–18DEC97
A44075
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–21/55
CAUTION: Arm is under spring tension. Support

arm before removing catch.
25. Support arm (B) and detach catch (A). Slowly rotate
arm one full rotation to release spring tension.
–UN–18DEC97
A—Catch
B—Support Arm
A44074
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–22/55
50
20
11
26. Remove cap screw and nut (A).
A—Cap Screw
–UN–18DEC97
A44073

012606
PN=231
27. Remove parts (A—H).
A—Torsion Spring
B—Spacer
C—Arm
D—Torsion Spring
E—Cap Screw, M12 x 60
F—Spacer (2 used)
G—Chain Sprocket, 12 Tooth
H—Nut, M12
–UN–18DEC97
A44072
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–24/55
A— Bolt, M8 x 20, (9 used)

B—Pressed Flange Housing, (6 used)
C—Ball Bearing, (3 used)
50 D—Nut, M8, (9 used).
20
12
–UN–18DEC97
A44071
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–25/55
29. Remove parts (A—E).

B—Spacer, (2 used)
C—Catch
–UN–18DEC97
E—Panel
A44070

012606
PN=232
30. Remove bolt and nut (A) and clip (B).
A—Bolt and Nut

B—Clip
–UN–18DEC97
A44069
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–27/55
31. Remove parts (A—H). Repair or replace parts as

necessary.
32. Install parts (A—H).
A—Nut, M10 (3 used)
–UN–18DEC97
B—Pressed Flange Housing (2 used)
C—Ball Bearing
D—Bolt, M10 x 25 (3 used)
E—Nut, M8 (3 used)
A44068
F—Pressed Flange Housing (2 used)
G—Ball Bearing
H—Bolt, M8 x 20 (3 used)
50
20
13
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–28/55
33. Install clip (B) and bolt and nut (A).
A—Bolt and Nut

B—Clip
–UN–18DEC97
A44069

012606
PN=233
34. Install parts (A—D) with hook end of catch (C) facing
down.

C—Catch
–UN–18DEC97
E—Panel
A44070
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–30/55
35. Install parts (A—D).
A—Bolt, M8 x 20, (9 used)

B—Pressed Flange Housing, (6 used)
D—Nut, M8, (9 used)
–UN–18DEC97
50
20
14
A44071
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–31/55
NOTE: When installing torsion springs, long end should fit

into panel/plate slots and short end should hook
arm.
36. Install parts (A—H).
A—Torsion Spring
B—Spacer
C—Arm
D—Torsion Spring
E—Cap Screw, M12 x 60
–UN–18DEC97
F—Spacer, (2 used)
G—Chain Sprocket, 12 Tooth
H—Nut, M12
A44072

012606
PN=234
37. Install cap screw and nut (A).
–UN–18DEC97
A44073
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–33/55
38. Slowly rotate arm one full rotation to load spring

tension. Support arm (B) and attach catch (A).
A—Catch
B—Support Arm
–UN–18DEC97
A44074
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–34/55
50
20
15
39. Install chain sprocket (B) and two spacers (A).
A—Spacers
B—Sprocket
–UN–18DEC97
A44075
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–35/55
40. With catch (B) attached to arm (A), install cap screw
and nut (C).
A—Arm
B—Catch
C—Cap Screw and Nut
–UN–18DEC97
A44076

012606
PN=235
NOTE: Axle flange mounts against deep side of wheel

assembly.
41. Install parts (A—E).
A—Wheel Assembly
–UN–18DEC97
B—Axle
C—Cotter Pin
D—Nut, 9/16 in., (5 used)
E—Wheel Bolt, 9/16 in., (5 used)
A44077
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–37/55
42. Install parts (A—C).
A—Torsion Spring
B—Support
–UN–18DEC97
50
20
16
A44078
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–38/55
A—Pressed Flange Housing, (2 used)

B—Ball Bearing
C—Plate
D—Torsion Spring
–UN–18DEC97
A44079

012606
PN=236
44. Install three bolts and nuts (B) and cotter pin (A).
A—Cotter Pin
B—Bolts and Nuts
–UN–18DEC97
A44080
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–40/55
45. Install tube (A).
A—Tube
–UN–18DEC97
A44081
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–41/55
50
20
17
46. Install two bolts and nuts (A).
A—Bolts and Nuts
–UN–18DEC97
A44082
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–42/55
47. Install bolt and nut (A) to load springs (B). To adjust
bolt and nut, (See ADJUSTING SEED
TRANSMISSION WHEEL ENGAGEMENT POINT in
this group).
A—Bolt and Nut

–UN–18DEC97
B—Springs
A44083

012606
PN=237
48. Install marked clamp (B) to mark on shaft (A).
A—Shaft
B—Clamp
–UN–18DEC97
A44084
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–44/55
NOTE: Alignment of bearings may be needed to install

shaft.
49. Install parts (A—C). To align bearings, loosen nuts

and bolts on bearings, slide shaft through bearings,
then tighten nuts and bolts.
–UN–18DEC97
A—Chain Sprocket
B—Spacer
C—Shaft
A44085
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–45/55
50
20
18
50. Install marked clamp (B) to mark on shaft (A).
A—Shaft
B—Clamp
–UN–18DEC97
A44086
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–46/55

shaft.
51. Install parts (A—C). To align bearings, loosen nut and

bolts on bearings, slide shaft through bearings, then
tighten nuts and bolts.
–UN–18DEC97
A—Shaft
B—Chain Sprocket
C—Spacer, (4 used)
A44087

012606
PN=238
52. Install cotter pin (A).
A—Cotter Pin
–UN–18DEC97
A44088
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–48/55

shaft.
53. Install shaft (A). To align bearings, loosen nuts and

bolts on bearings, slide shaft through bearings, then
tighten nuts and bolts. 50
20
19
54. Install three cotter pins (B) to marks on shafts (A) and
(C).
–UN–29DEC97
A—Shaft
C—Shaft
A44089

012606
PN=239
55. Install parts (A—C).
A—Chain Sprocket, 36 Tooth, (2 used)

B—Chain Sprocket, 18 Tooth
C—Chain Sprocket, 48 Tooth
–UN–18DEC97
A44090
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–50/55
56. Install two quick lock pins (A).
A—Quick Lock Pins
50
–UN–18DEC97
20
20
A44091
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–51/55
A—Chain Sprocket, 12 Tooth, (2 used)

C—Washer, (4 used)
–UN–18DEC97
A44092

012606
PN=240
58. Install two nuts (A).
A—Nut (2 used)
–UN–18DEC97
A44093
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–53/55
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten nuts on U-bolt.

Clutch should have slight movement in
U-bolt. If nuts are overtightened, clutch
can malfunction.
NOTE: Make sure left clutch is installed on left side of
–UN–18DEC97
seed transmission, and right clutch is installed on
right side of seed transmission. Clutches are not
interchangeable. CW on identification plate
indicates a left-hand clutch, CCW on identification
A44094
plate indicates a right-hand clutch.
59. Install parts (A—E), if equipped. 50

B—Spacer, (2 used) 20
C—Adjusting Strap 21
D—U-Bolt
E—Clutch
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–54/55
60. Install two nuts (A), if equipped.
61. Repeat Steps 59 and 60 for opposite side, if

equipped.
62. Install roller chains as necessary.
A—Nut (2 used)
–UN–18DEC97
A44095
KC01776,00014CE –19–26JAN06–55/55

012606
PN=241
Adjust Seed Transmission Wheel

Engagement Point
IMPORTANT: Making dimension (C) too large will

cause interference with fold cylinder.
Check for clearance when
–UN–26JUL96
folding/unfolding.
The seed transmission engages when planter is lowered

into planting position (transmission wheel contacts drive
A37454
wheel) and disengages when planter is raised into
transport position.
NOTE: To disconnect drive sooner - decrease dimension

(C). To disconnect later - increase dimension (C).
Adjust bolt (A) to dimension (C) of 114 mm (4.50 in.) to

establish engagement point of transmission wheel (B) with
drive wheel in the lowering cycle of the planter.
A—Bolt
B—Transmission Wheel
C—Dimension
–UN–16AUG95
50
A37455
20
22
KC01776,00014CF –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=242
Group 30
Drillshaft
Specifications
Drive Coupler Alignment Distance 0—3 mm

(0—1/8 in.)
OUO1073,0001FD8 –19–25JAN06–1/1
Remove and Install Wing Frame Drillshaft
Remove Outer Wing Drillshaft
NOTE: Left-hand wing is shown. Right-hand wing is

similar. Two drillshafts are used on each wing.
1. Remove seed hoppers from section of frame, drillshafts

are to be removed.
KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–1/7
50
30
1
2. Loosen idler (B) and remove chain (A).
A—Drive Chain
B—Idler
–UN–25SEP02
A50366
Continued on next page KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–2/7

012606
PN=243
Drillshaft
NOTE: Note location of clamp (B).
3. Loosen clamps (A and B).
A—Clamp
B—Clamp
–UN–25SEP02
A50367
–UN–25SEP02
A50368
KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–3/7
50
30
2
4. Remove cotter pins (A).
5. Slide drillshaft out the left-hand side of planter.
–UN–25SEP02
7. Inspect row unit drive sprockets and bearings. Replace
as necessary.
8. Install parts in reverse order.

A50372
A—Cotter Pin (2 used)
Continued on next page KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–4/7

012606
PN=244
Drillshaft
Remove Inner Wing Drillshaft
NOTE: Planter needs to be folded to remove inner wing

shaft.
1. Loosen idler (B). Remove master link and drive chain
–UN–25SEP02
(C).
2. Remove clamp (A), sprocket and washers (D).
A50373
A—Clamp
B—Idler
C—Drive Chain
D—Washers
KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–5/7
3. Remove cotter pins (A and B).
A—Cotter Pin
B—Cotter Pin
50
30
–UN–25SEP02
3
A50370
KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–6/7
4. Remove cotter pin (B) and coupler (C).
5. Slide drillshaft (A) out right side of planter.
6. Inspect and replace as necessary. –UN–25SEP02

as necessary.

A50371
9. Align drillshaft couplers. (See procedure in this group.)
A—Drillshaft
B—Cotter Pin
C—Coupler
KC01776,00014D0 –19–20DEC02–7/7

012606
PN=245
Drillshaft
Remove and Install Center Frame Drillshaft
NOTE: Machine must be folded to remove and install

left-hand center frame drillshaft. Procedure for
right-hand center frame drillshaft is similar.
–UN–25SEP02
1. Remove cotter pin (B) and coupler (A).
A—Coupler
B—Cotter Pin
A50374
KC01776,00014D1 –19–15JUL05–1/2
2. On last row unit, loosen clamp (C) and slide drillshaft

(A) out left-hand side of planter.

as necessary.
–UN–25SEP02
4. Inspect drillshaft and repair or replace if necessary.
A50375
A—Drillshaft
B—Sprocket
50 C—Clamp
30
4
KC01776,00014D1 –19–15JUL05–2/2
Remove and Install Upper Drillshaft
NOTE: Procedure is shown on right-hand inner upper

drive drillshaft, procedure for remaining drive
drillshafts are similar.
–UN–25SEP02
NOTE: Planter needs to be folded to remove inner upper

drive drillshafts.
1. Loosen idler (C). Remove master link and drive chain

A50376
(A).
2. Loosen clamp (B).

A—Drive Chain
B—Clamp
C—Idler
Continued on next page KC01776,00014D2 –19–15JUL05–1/4

012606
PN=246
Drillshaft
3. Loosen idler (A). Remove master link and drive chain

(D).
4. Loosen set screws (B) and remove shear pin (C).
A—Idler
–UN–25SEP02
B—Set Screw (2 used)
C—Shear Pin
D—Drive Chain
A50377
KC01776,00014D2 –19–15JUL05–2/4
5. Loosen and remove clamp (A).
A—Clamp
–UN–25SEP02
A50378
KC01776,00014D2 –19–15JUL05–3/4
50
30
5
6. Remove drillshaft (B) to the right and catch sprockets
(A) and driver (C).
7. Inspect drillshaft and repair or replace if necessary.
–UN–25SEP02
A—Sprocket (2 used)
B—Drillshaft
C—Driver
A50379
–UN–25SEP02
A50380
KC01776,00014D2 –19–15JUL05–4/4

012606
PN=247
Drillshaft
Aligning Drillshaft Couplers
It may be necessary to align couplers (A). The FLAT

surfaces (C) on the SIDES of the couplers should be
touching and in alignment. To align the couplers, proceed
as follows.
–UN–01OCT02
1. Loosen all clamps (B) and slide drillshaft, to align Flat
surfaces laterally.
A50524
2. Loosen cap screws (D) and align shafts.
3. After maximum alignment is obtained on surfaces (C)

and shafts are in alignment, tighten cap screws (D)
and clamps (B).
A—Couplers
B—Clamp
C—Flat Surfaces
–UN–01OCT02
D—Cap Screws
A50525
Continued on next page KC01776,00014D3 –19–25JAN06–1/2
50
30
6

012606
PN=248
Drillshaft
NOTE: Chains may have to be removed to rotate shafts.
4. Rotate drive couplers by hand and observe alignment

of coupler flat surfaces (C). Drive coupler surfaces
should align to within 3 mm (1/8 in.) throughout full
rotation. If alignment exceeds 3 mm (1/8 in.), adjust as
follows:
–UN–25JAN06
Specification
Drive Coupler Alignment—
Distance ........................................................................................ 0—3 mm
A57411
(0—1/8 in.)
NOTE: It may be necessary to loosen mounting hardware

on additional bearing flanges along length of
drillshaft to provide more room for adjustment.
a. Loosen cap screws and nuts (A) on bearing flange

(B) on each side of couplers.
–UN–25JAN06
b. Adjust drillshaft position as required to align flat
surfaces (C) of drive couplers as shown.
c. Tighten all bearing flange hardware.
A57409
d. Rotate drillshaft one complete revolution and verify
Proper Coupler Alignment
couplers maintain alignment throughout entire
rotation. 50
30
7
B—Bearing Flange
C—Coupler Flat Surfaces
–UN–25JAN06
A57410
Improper Alignment—Adjustment Required
KC01776,00014D3 –19–25JAN06–2/2

012606
PN=249
Drillshaft
50
30
8

012606
PN=250
Group 40
Half-Width Disconnect
Remove and Install Half-Width Disconnect
NOTE: There are two half-width disconnect clutches used

on each seed drive transmission.
NOTE: Procedure is shown on right-hand side half-width
–UN–18SEP02
disconnect, procedure for left-hand side is the
same.
1. Disconnect clutch harness (E) from planter harness.
A50320
2. Remove chain (A).
3. Remove clamp (C) and U-bolt (D). A—Chain

B—Half-Width Disconnect
C—Clamp
4. Slide half-width disconnect from shaft. D—U-Bolt
E—Harness, Clutch
5. Repair half-width disconnect. (See procedure in this
group.)
KC01776,00014D4 –19–20DEC02–1/1
50
40
1

012606
PN=251
Half-Width Disconnect
50
40
2

012606
PN=252
Group 45
Variable Rate Drive
Variable Rate Drive
For information on Variable Rate Drive, see procedures in

TM2099, SEEDSTAR Generation 2, Map Based Seeding
and Variable Rate Fertilizer manual.
OUO6046,0001CDE –19–28OCT04–1/1
50
45
1

012606
PN=253
Variable Rate Drive
50
45
2

012606
PN=254
Section 70
Hydraulics
Contents
Page
Group 05—Motors
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-1
Inspect Vacuum Blower Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-1
Repair Vacuum Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-2
Inspect Central Commodity System
Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-5
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-6
Group 10—Miscellaneous
Remove and Install Hydraulic Oil Cooler . . . . . .70-10-1
70

012606
PN=1
Contents
70

012606
PN=2
Group 05
Motors
Specifications
Vacuum Motor End Cap Cap Screws Torque 13—17 N•m

(114—150 lb-in.)
Central Commodity System Blower Torque 51—58 N•m

Motor Cap Screw (38—43 lb-ft)
Cartridge Valve Torque 23—27 N•m

(17—20 lb-ft)
Coil Nut Torque 5.4—6.8 N•m

(48—60 lb-in.)
Check Valve Torque 23—27 N•m

(17—20 lb-ft)
Threaded Plug Torque 13—16 N•m

(115—142 lb-in.)
OUO6046,0001C54 –19–15MAR04–1/1
Inspect Vacuum Blower Motor

between the motor and blower housing is 70
acceptable. 05
1
1. Check vacuum motor (A) for oil leaks, making sure all
–UN–04FEB04
fittings are tight.
2. Inspect vacuum blower guard for dust or seed
A53731
inoculant/treatment.
3. Clean blower guard with a rag or a small brush when

necessary. A—Vacuum Motor
OUO6046,0001906 –19–09JAN06–1/1

012606
PN=257
Motors
Repair Vacuum Blower Motor
1. Remove cap screws (A) and end cap.
–UN–18FEB04
A53846
OUO6046,0001C2F –19–17FEB04–1/8
2. Remove snap ring (A) and shaft key (B).
A—Snap Ring
B—Shaft Key
–UN–18FEB04
A53847
OUO6046,0001C2F –19–17FEB04–2/8
IMPORTANT: Timing of gears is important to maintain

efficiency of motor. Scribe marks on
end of shafts so that gears will be
70 meshed the same upon reassembly.
05
2 NOTE: Do not discard gasket (D). Gasket must be used
for reassembly.
–UN–18FEB04
3. Remove gear and shaft assembly (B), gear (C), shaft
key, and gasket (D).
A53848
4. Remove shaft (E) and back-up ring by lightly tapping

on end of shaft with a soft faced hammer.
A—Scribe Marks
B—Gear and Shaft Assembly
C—Gear
D—Gasket
E—Shaft
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001C2F –19–17FEB04–3/8

012606
PN=258
Motors
5. Clamp motor in soft-jawed vise.
6. Remove seal (A) using a slide hammer.
A—Seal
–UN–18FEB04
A53849
OUO6046,0001C2F –19–17FEB04–4/8
7. Remove snap ring (A) and bearing (B).
8. Inspect parts, repair or replace as necessary.
9. Install in reverse order using the following special

instructions:
–UN–18FEB04
A—Snap Ring
B—Bearing
A53850
70
05
3

012606
PN=259
Motors
• Install seal (A) as follows:

– Apply a small amount of grease to lip of seal (A)
and place into opening with lip down as shown.
– Install back-up ring (B) on top of seal with
recessed end towards seal.
– Using an appropriate driver, press seal in until
back-up ring bottoms on interior shoulder.
–UN–18FEB04
A—Seal
B—Back-up Ring
A53851
–UN–18FEB04
A53852
OUO6046,0001C2F –19–17FEB04–6/8
NOTE: Back-up ring must be installed with recess

towards bearing to provide clearance for snap ring
70 on shaft.
05
4 • Remove back-up ring (B) and reinstall on top of seal
with recessed end facing up.
–UN–18FEB04
• Place a piece of tape (A) over shaft key hole to keep
from cutting seal lip during installation.
• Install gasket which was removed in Step 3.
• Align marks made in Step 3 and install gear and A53853
gear and shaft assembly.
A—Tape
B—Back-up Ring

012606
PN=260
Motors
• Install snap ring (A) with bowed end facing bearing

A
as shown.
• Tighten end cap cap screws to specification.
Specification
Vacuum Motor End Cap Cap
Screws—Torque ...................................................................... 13—17 N•m
–UN–20FEB04
(114—150 lb-in.)
A—Snap Ring
A53862
OUO6046,0001C2F –19–17FEB04–8/8
Inspect Central Commodity System Blower

Motor

between the motor and blower housing is
acceptable.
–UN–01JUL05
1. Check CCS motor (A) for oil leaks. Ensure all fittings
are tight.
A56682
A—Blower Motor
(S.N. 715101—) Shown
70
05
OUO1073,0001F25 –19–12AUG05–1/2
5
2. Inspect hydraulic oil cooler (A) for leaks and/or debris.

Ensure all fittings are tight.

cooler. Bent fins do not allow proper
cooling of hydraulic system.
–UN–01JUL05
3. If oil cooler fins are plugged with debris, remove cooler

(leave hoses attached) and clean, using low pressure
compressed air, hot soapy water, or both.
A56683
A—Hydraulic Oil Cooler

(S.N. 715101—) Shown
OUO1073,0001F25 –19–12AUG05–2/2

012606
PN=261
Motors

Motor
1. Remove shaft key (A).
2. Clamp motor in protected vise.
–UN–27MAR02
A—Shaft Key
A48899
(S.N. —715100)
–UN–03AUG05
A56901
(S.N. 715101—)
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–1/26
3. Remove coil nut and washer (A).
4. Remove coil (B), check valve (C) and threaded plug

70 (D).
05
6
A—Coil Nut and Washer
–UN–27MAR02
B—Coil
C—Check Valve
D—Threaded Plug (3 used)
A48883
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–2/26
5. Remove valve (A) using a wrench on hex portion only.
A—Valve
–UN–27MAR02
A48884
Continued on next page OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–3/26

012606
PN=262
Motors
6. Remove orifice (A) using a pick.
A—Orifice
–UN–05NOV02
A50874
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–4/26
7. Remove cap screws (A) and end cap (B).
A—Cap Screws (4 used)

B—End Cap
–UN–27MAR02
A48891
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–5/26
NOTE: Gear support may stick to housing when

removing.
8. Remove gasket (A), O-ring (B) and housing (C). 70

05
9. Turn housing over. 7
–UN–27MAR02
A—Gasket
B—O-Ring
C—Housing
A48892
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–6/26
10. Remove O-ring (A) and gear support (B).
A—O-Ring
B—Gear Support
–UN–27MAR02
A48896

012606
PN=263
Motors

efficiency of motor. Scribe marks on
ends of shafts so that gears will be
meshed the same upon reassembly.
11. Remove gears (A) and gear support (B).
–UN–27MAR02
A—Gear (2 used)
B—Gear Support
A48893
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–8/26
12. Remove gasket (A) from support (B).
A—Gasket
B—Support
–UN–27MAR02
A48901
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–9/26
IMPORTANT: Note direction of seal lip before

removing seal (A).
70 13. Remove seal (A).

05
8
A—Seal
–UN–27MAR02
A48914
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–10/26
IMPORTANT: Note direction of seal lip before

removing seal (B).
14. Remove snap ring (A) and seal (B).
A—Snap Ring
–UN–27MAR02
B—Seal
A48897

012606
PN=264
Motors
NOTE: Motor gears, housing, and gear supports are

broke in as a set. It is not possible to replace any
of them without replacing entire motor.
15. Inspect brass bushing (A) in both gear supports (B). If

excessive wear, then replace motor.
–UN–27MAR02
A—Brass Bushing (4 used)
B—Gear Support (2 used)
A48898
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–12/26
16. Remove O-rings (A, C and E) from solenoid valve (B),

check valve (D) and threaded plug (F).
A—O-Ring (2 used)
B—Solenoid Valve
C—O-Ring (2 used)
–UN–27MAR02
D—Check Valve
E—O-Ring (3 used)
F—Threaded Plug (3 used)
A48900
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–13/26
17. Install seal (B) and snap ring (A).
A—Snap Ring
B—Seal 70
05
9
–UN–27MAR02
A48897
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–14/26
18. Install new seal (A).
A—Seal
–UN–27MAR02
A48914

012606
PN=265
Motors
19. Install new gasket (A) on support (B).
A—Gasket
B—Support
–UN–27MAR02
A48901
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–16/26
IMPORTANT: Gasket side of gear support must face

flanged housing.
20. Install gear support (B).
–UN–27MAR02
efficiency of motor. Align marks made
in Step 11 to ensure proper mesh.
21. Install gears (A).
A48893
A—Gear (2 used)
B—Gear Support
70
05
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–17/26
10
IMPORTANT: There is a dimple on the housing

distinguishing top from the bottom.
22. Install new O-ring (A) at bottom of housing.
A—O-Ring
–UN–27MAR02
A48902

012606
PN=266
Motors
23. Install housing (A) with dimple (B) facing upward.
A—Housing
B—Dimple
–UN–27MAR02
A48903
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–19/26
24. Install gear support (A), gasket (B) and O-ring (C).
A—Gear Support
B—Gasket
C—O-Ring
–UN–27MAR02
A48904
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–20/26
25. Install end cap (B) and cap screws (A).
26. Tighten cap screws (A) to specification.

70
Specification 05
Central Commodity System 11
Blower Motor Cap Screw—
–UN–27MAR02
Torque ..................................................................................... 51—58 N•m
(38—43 lb-ft)
A48891
B—End Cap

012606
PN=267
Motors
27. Install new O-rings (A, C and E) to solenoid valve (B),

check valve (D) and threaded plug (F).
A—O-Ring (2 used)
B—Solenoid Valve
C—O-Ring (2 used)
–UN–27MAR02
D—Check Valve
E—O-Ring (3 used)
F—Threaded Plug (3 used)
A48900
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–22/26
NOTE: Rotate motor in vise to install orifice (A).
28. Install orifice (A) with bevel side down.
A—Orifice
–UN–05NOV02
A50874
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–23/26
29. Install cartridge valve (A) and tighten to specification.
Specification
Cartridge Valve—Torque ....................................................... 23—27 N•m
70 (17—20 lb-ft)
05
12
–UN–05NOV02
A—Cartridge Valve
A50870

012606
PN=268
Motors
30. Install coil (B).
31. Install washer and coil nut (A). Tighten to

specification.
Specification
Coil Nut—Torque ................................................................... 5.4—6.8 N•m
–UN–27MAR02
(48—60 lb-in.)
32. Install check valve (C) and threaded plug (D). Tighten
to specification.
A48883
Specification
Check Valve—Torque ............................................................. 23—27 N•m
(17—20 lb-ft) A—Coil Nut and Washer
Threaded Plug—Torque .......................................................... 13—16 N•m B—Coil
(115—142 lb-in.) C—Check Valve
D—Threaded Plug (3 used)
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–25/26
33. Install shaft key (A).
A—Shaft Key
–UN–27MAR02
A48899
70
05
(S.N. —715100)
13
–UN–03AUG05
A56901
(S.N. 715101—)
OUO6046,0001BFB –19–12AUG05–26/26

012606
PN=269
Motors
70
05
14

012606
PN=270
Group 10
Miscellaneous
Remove and Install Hydraulic Oil Cooler
CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping fluid

under pressure, relieve the pressure in the
system and stop engine before disconnecting
or connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
all connections before applying pressure.
1. Relieve hydraulic system pressure. (See procedure in

this section.)
OUO1073,0001F60 –19–12AUG05–1/2
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove fan housing from

frame of machine to service hydraulic oil cooler.
2. Identify hydraulic hoses (B) and disconnect; then cap

ports and hose ends.
–UN–06FEB04
cooler. Bent fins do not allow proper
cooling of hydraulic system.
A53821
3. Remove cap screws (A).
4. Remove hydraulic oil cooler (C). (S.N. —715100)
IMPORTANT: Connect hydraulic lines to correct

ports.
70
10
6. Install in reverse order. 1
–UN–22JUL05
A—Cap Screws
B—Hydraulic Hoses (2 used)
C—Oil Cooler
(S.N. 715101—) A56845
OUO1073,0001F60 –19–12AUG05–2/2

012606
PN=271
Miscellaneous
70
10
2

012606
PN=272
Section 240
Electrical Diagnosis and Test
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—How To Use This Diagnostic Group 15J—Machine Fold-Unfold Diagnostics

Information Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15J-1
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-1 Fold Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15J-2
Group 10—Solenoid Sequence Table Group 15K—Marker Raise-Lower - Manual Mode

Solenoid Sequence Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-10-1 Diagnostics
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15K-1
Marker Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15K-3
Group 15A—Auxiliary Power Outlet Diagnostics
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-1
Group 15L—Tongue Latch Diagnostics
Auxiliary Outlet Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-2
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15L-1
Tongue Latch Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15L-2
Group 15B—CCS Seed Delivery Agitator
Diagnostics Group 15M—Tongue Lift Diagnostics
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15B-1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15M-1
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15B-2 Tongue Lift Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15M-2
Group 15C—CCS Low Tank Warning Diagnostics Group 15N—Transport Lift Diagnostics
Theory Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15C-1 Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15N-1
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15C-2 Transport Lift Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15N-2
Group 20—Connector Locations

Group 15D—CCS Planter Raise/Lower Diagnostics
Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-20-1
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15D-1
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15D-3
Group 15E—CCS Seed Delivery Fan Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15E-1
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15E-2
240
Group 15F—CCS Tank Fill Lights Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15F-1
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15F-2
Group 15G—Field Raise-Lower Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15G-1
Field Raise Lower Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15G-2
Group 15H—Half Width Disconnect Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15H-1
Half Width Disconnect Schematic . . . . . . . . 240-15H-2
Group 15I—Lighting Overall Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15I-1
Light Schematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15I-3

012606
PN=1
Contents
240

012606
PN=2
Group 05
How To Use This Diagnostic Information
General Information
How to Use the Electrical Diagnostic Group How to use the Diagnostic Procedures
All electrical systems on this machine are divided into The diagnostic procedures for this machine are written
functional systems. Each system has a Diagnostic in a step-by-step format to help the technician isolate
Group. the failed components of the specific system being
diagnosed.
IMPORTANT: Troubleshoot the machine one
problem at a time. Repairing one IMPORTANT: Troubleshoot the machine one
system’s problem may solve a problem at a time. Repairing one
problem in several other systems. system’s problem may solve a
problem in several other systems.
NOTE: If it is determined that a problem is not in an
electrical system, the diagnostic routine will NOTE: If it is determined that a problem is not in an
refer you to the proper diagnostic group in the electrical system, the diagnostic routine will
manual. refer you to the proper section of the manual.
Each Electrical Diagnostic Group is divided into the Things to remember when using diagnostic
following parts: procedures:
• Brief Description - provides a quick explanation of • Following each procedure step-by-step is very
the system function. important. Skipping a step, or steps, could cause the
• Basic Operation - provides operational instructions of technician to miss, overlook or possibly misdiagnose
the systems’ basic features. a possible problem.
• Detailed Description - describes the actual operation • Each test step contains all requirements for that test.
of the system. This includes switch settings, connectors to be
• Connector Locations - gives a pictorial description of disconnected and checks to be performed.
the electrical connector locations on the machine. • Unless a test procedure says to disconnect a
Connectors are identified by Connector Number. connector, leave connected and probe the rear of
(See the Connector Identification Group for location the connector to perform test.
photograph, pin numbers, circuit codes or wire If a test segment says to disconnect a connector,
colors and repair procedures.) disconnect and test the circuit as directed.
• Electrical Schematic - shows: • At the end of each test step, reconnect all
– System Components - All components associated components that have been disconnected.
with the system operation. • Many references in the diagnostic procedure will
– Connectors - Every connector is given a refer to 12 VDC. 12 VDC is a reference to battery
Connector Number to aid in identification. The voltage, but is not a specific voltage or exactly 12
240
Connector Identification Group has been added to Volts. A typical range of acceptable battery voltage 05
provide detailed connector location photographs, is from 12.5 to 14.9 depending on battery state of 1
pin number/circuit code lists, mating face views battery charge and engine running or not.
and repair procedures. • For a voltage or resistance check, use the positive
– Wiring Harnesses - All wiring harnesses meter lead for the first test point specified and the
associated with the system. negative meter lead on the second test point.
• Diagnostics - provides a step by step approach to
help the technician isolate the problem of the
specific system being diagnosed.
Continued on next page HX05709,0002EC9 –19–01FEB02–1/12

012606
PN=275
• If a procedure directs you to replace a blown fuse Why: This can damage electronic components
and the new fuse immediately fails, use the
schematic to trace and check all involved circuits for • Do not connect or disconnect electrical connectors
a shorted or grounded wire. while the key switch is on or the machine is running.
Why: This can cause computer system errors from
General Electrical System Diagnostic Information interrupting a computer program while it is running
and electrical voltage spikes that are produced can
Electrical System Visual Inspection damage electronic components.
Visual inspection of the electrical system’s wiring • Do not apply power or ground to any component as
harnesses and components for the following items can a test unless specifically instructed to do so.
significantly reduce diagnostic time: Why: Connecting the wrong voltage to the wrong
point of an electronic system can cause electronic
• Mechanical damage to the wiring harness covering component failures.
or harness itself
• Disconnected or damaged connectors • When welding on the machine, make sure to
• Bare wires and/or shorts to ground connect ground lead to the parts being welded. For
• Loose wires and/or open circuits maximum protection disconnect all electronic
• Poor/corroded connections controllers before welding.
• Battery condition (terminal corrosion, voltage, cold Why: The high currents associated with welding can
cranking amperage capacity, electrolyte level) damage wiring harnesses that are involved in the
• Alternator condition (dirty, belt tension) ground path. Welding can also cause electrical
• Overheated or discolored components voltage spikes that can damage electronic
components.
Basic Electrical Component Handling / Precautions
for Vehicles Equipped with Computer Controlled Electrical Connector / Wiring Harness Handling
Systems and Repair
• Never disconnect the batteries while the key switch • Electrical connectors must not be forcibly mated or
is on and the engine is running. un-mated.
Why: This can cause electrical voltage spikes that Why: The connectors have been designed to be
can damage electronic components. mated easily. If you have to use tools or excessive
force you may be doing something wrong. Prying on
• Do not connect jumper cables while the key switch or forcing connectors may cause permanent damage
is on. to the locking mechanism, contacts or both.
Why: This can cause electrical voltage spikes that
can damage electronic components. • When working on connectors make sure you are
working on the correct terminal!
240
05 • Disconnect batteries prior to recharging (if possible) Why: Measuring diagnostic values at the wrong
2 Why: Electrical loads in the machine can slow the connector terminal can lead to unnecessary part
recharging process. Battery chargers can cause replacement. The male and female halves of an
electrical voltage spikes that can damage electronic electrical connector are mirror images of each other
components. and it is easy to confuse terminal locations. Look for
the terminal identifier info on the connector body.
• Never jump start the machine with a voltage higher
than the machine is designed to operate on • Use proper terminals for any connector repairs.

012606
PN=276
Why: In some connectors different terminal materials "Heat-Shrinkable" butt splices. Be careful not to
are used (to carry different currents). If improper place a splice in any section of the harness subject
terminals or terminal materials are used future to motion or flexing.
electrical problems may occur from corrosion or
current carrying capacity. Diagnostic Schematic and Schematic Symbols
Information
• When removing terminals from a connector body it is
very important to use the proper extraction tool and How to use an Electrical Diagnostic Schematic
procedure. Extraction tools are available through
SERVICEGARD. All electrical systems on this machine are divided into
Why: The connector body can be damaged if systems. Each system has a Diagnostic Schematic
terminals are just "jerked" out. The damage caused associated with it that provides a complete view of all
by this action may not be readily visible, but may associated components, connectors, terminal numbers,
prevent new terminals from being properly retained wiring harnesses, and ground points. An example is
and cause replacement of the connector body. shown below.
• When installing a new terminal on a wire make sure Diagnostic Schematics are provided to allow a
the proper crimping tools is used. technician to all the electrical components associated
Why: Each part of the electrical terminal is designed with a particular system on the machine.
for a specific purpose, failure to properly crimp the
terminal can result in future electrical or mechanical This schematic will allow you to follow the wiring from
problems. Terminal crimping tools are available a component through all associated wiring harnesses
through SERVICEGARD. It is important to make to its final point of use.
sure the insulation and wire crimps on each terminal
are made properly. Soldering terminals is not Only the terminals of a connector that are used are
recommended. See repair procedures in the shown.
Connector Repair Procedures Group
Only the components of a system that are used are
• Soldering splices is not recommended. shown.
Why: Any repairs to wires in the harness should not
allow moisture to come in contact with the actual Every ground point on this machine has been assigned
copper conductor. Soldering a wire splice is not a connector identifier number (X999) and location info
recommended because a portion of stranded wire is available in Section 240 Connector Information
will become solid and can cause it to break in the group of this technical manual.
future, especially if it is subject to movement. When
repairing a broken wire in a wiring harness, use
240
05
3

012606
PN=277
W2 W13
Armrest Left Main
Harness Harness
Harness End Indicator
Wire Circuit Component Identification Code

Code Number and Component Name
Connector Identifier
998 To Field Lights in Cab
Main Harness Electrical
Component Assembly
A16
Connection to Power Distribution
Wires Twisted another system Board 1
in Harness
Field Light
System K2
Field Lights
X571 X204 87a
30
998 998 87
J4 4
964 964
J7 5 85 86
965 965
J9 6
999 998
K5 7
A41
CAN Bus
Harness Wire Replaceable Electrical
10 Component
Indicates other CAN Bus 2
Components
X393
Indicates Terminals
240
05 in same Connector
4 Body Electrical Component
Assembly Internal Ground
Chassis Ground
Connection
–19–31AUG00
Connector Terminal Identifier

HXC64776
"How to use schematic"

Aug 31, 2000 - 07:18 / SLW HXC64776

012606
PN=278
240
05
5
–19–13AUG97
H50072
Electrical Schematic Symbols


012606
PN=279
240
05
6 –19–12AUG97
H49595

012606
PN=280
–19–06SEP95
RW45740
Seven Step Electrical Test Procedure machine. Study this manual, especially the diagrams of
the system.
Seven Basic Steps
Schematics are an important tool - you should know
A good program of diagnosis and testing has seven how to read them.
240
basic steps:
05
Be familiar with the key specifications of the system 7
• Know the System given in each section of the machine technical manual.
• Ask the Operator
• Inspect the System Keep up with the latest service bulletins. Read them
• Operate the machine (if possible) and file them. The problem on your latest machine
• List the possible Causes may be in this month’s bulletin, giving the cause and
• Reach a Conclusion the remedy. You will be prepared for any problem by
• Test your Conclusion knowing the system.
Know the System
In other words, do your homework. Find out all you

can about the electrical and electronic systems of the

012606
PN=281
Ask the Operator • Other trouble signs
What work was the machine doing when the trouble In general, look for anything unusual. Many electrical
was noticed? Is the trouble erratic or consistent? What failures cannot be detected even if the machine is
did the operator do after the breakdown? Was an started. Therefore, a systematic and complete
attempt made to fix the problem? inspection of the electrical and electronic systems is
necessary. Many times the problem can be detected
These are just a few of the many questions a good without turning on a switch or starting the engine.
troubleshooter will ask the operator. Often a passing While inspecting the electrical and electronics systems,
comment by the operator will provide the key to the make notes of all trouble signs.
problem. Ask about how the machine is used and
when it was last serviced. Many problems can be Carefully inspect the electrical and electronic
traced to poor periodic maintenance programs or components for possible clues to the malfunction.
abuse to the machine. Check to see if the machine can be operated without
further damage to the system.
Inspect the System
Operate the Machine (if possible)
Carefully inspect the electrical and electronic
components for possible clues into the malfunction. If your inspection shows that the machine can be run,
Check to see if the machine can be operated without first turn the Key Switch to the ACCESSORY position.
further damage to the system. Try out the accessory circuits - lights, lighter, etc. How
do each of these circuit work?
Always check these items before turning on switches
or running the machine. Turn the Key Switch to the RUN position. Do the
proper indicator lights come on in the Warning Display
• Look for bare wires that could cause grounds or Panel?
shorts and dangerous sparks. Shorted wires can
damage the changing system. Start the machine. Check all gauges and indicators for
• Look for loose or broken wires. In the charging proper operation.
system they can damage the regulator.
• Inspect all components, especially battery Operate the trouble system. Look for improper
connection points. Acid film and dirt on the battery operation.
may cause current flow between the battery
terminals, resulting in current leakage. Check the List the Possible Causes
battery ground strap for proper connection.
• Check the battery electrolyte level. Continued loss of Make a list of the possible causes. What were the
electrolyte indicates overcharging. signs you found while inspecting the machine? What is
• Check the alternator drive belt tension. the most likely cause? Are there other possibilities?
240
05 • Inspect for overheated parts after the machine has Remember that one failure often causes another.
8 been stopped for awhile. They will often smell like
burnt insulation. Put your hand on the alternator or Reach a Conclusion
regulator. Heat in these parts when the machine has
not been operated for some time is a sure tip-off to Look over you list of possible causes and decide which
charging circuit problems. are the most likely and which are the easiest to verify.

012606
PN=282
Test the Conclusion individual component. This is where test instruments

will help you further isolate the trouble spot.
Before you repair the system, test your conclusions to
see if they are correct. Many of the items can be Service Equipment and Tools
verified without further testing. Maybe you can isolate
the problem to a particular circuit, but not to an Recommended Tools
240
05
9

012606
PN=283
SERVICEGARD Tool Number JT05791A Digital

Multimeter
Use this tool for Voltage, Resistance and Current

Measurements.
Glossary
Component Names
Each component has a unique name and identifier for

reduced confusion in identifying parts in the diagnostic
process. These names are not necessarily the same
names used in normal conversation or marketing
literature.
The following is a table with all of the component names

and identifiers as used in this manual. Common names
and marketing literature names are also provided.
–UN–02OCT00
The identifier begins with a letter that describes the
device:
• A—System or Sub Assembly

•
P9778
B—Transducer
• D—Diode Block
• E—Lights
• F—Fuse or circuit breaker
• G—Battery or Alternator
• J—Connector
• K—Relay
• M—Motor
• R—Resistor or Potentiometer
• S—Switch
• W—Harness
• Y—Solenoid Valve
240
05
10

012606
PN=284
ID Diagnostic Name
A-System or Sub System
A301 Frame Control Console
A302 Flasher Module
Sensors
B1 Left Bin Level Sensor
B2 Right Bin Level Sensor
E - Lights
E301 Right Amber Hazard Lamp
E302 Right Red Tail Lamp
E303 Left Red Tail Lamp
E304 Left Amber Hazard Lamp
E305 CCS Tank Fill Lamp #1
E306 CCS Tank Fill Lamp #2
F - Fuse or Circuit Breaker
F3 Frame Control Power Fuse (10 Amp)
F4 Agitation Motor Fuse (15 Amp)
K - Relay
K30 Machine Transport Mode Relay
K31 CCS Agitator Motor Relay
K32 CCS Fan Motor Shut Off Relay
K34 CCS Clean Out Mode Relay
Motor
M2 Agitation Motor
S - Switch
S5 CCS Push Button Shut Off Switch (Row Unit)
S8 CCS Clean Out Switch (Manual Switch)
S101 Plant/Transport Mode Switch
S102 Fold/Transport Lift Switch
S103 Half Width Disconnect Switch
S104 Auto Marker Switch (Dimmer)
S105 Left/Right Marker Switch
S106 Auto/Manual Marker Mode Switch 240
S107 Tongue Lift/Latch Switch 05
11
S110 CCS Tank Fill Light Switch
W - Harness
W301 Frame Control Console Extension Harness
W302 Frame Harness
W303 CCS Harness
W304 Lighting Harness
Y - Solenoid
Y1 Left Marker Solenoid

012606
PN=285
ID Diagnostic Name
Y2 Right Marker Solenoid
Y3 CCS Seed Delivery Fan Solenoid
Y4 Transport Lift Solenoid #1
Y5 Transport Lift Solenoid #2
Y6 Fold Solenoid #1
Y7 Fold Solenoid #2
Y8 Right Half Width Disconnect Solenoid (Clutch) #1
Y9 Left Half Width Disconnect Solenoid (Clutch) #1
Y10 Tongue Lift Solenoid #1
Y11 Tongue Lift Solenoid #2
Y12 Tongue Latch Solenoid #1
Y13 Tongue Latch Solenoid #2
Y14 Field/Plant Solenoid
Y15 Right Half Width Disconnect Solenoid (Clutch) #2
Y16 Left Half Width Disconnect Solenoid (Clutch) #2
HX05709,0002EC9 –19–01FEB02–12/12
240
05
12

012606
PN=286
Group 10
Solenoid Sequence Table
The following table shows which solenoid valves are

energized when different system functions are in
operation.
Sequence
Solenoids
Operations
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16
Plant E
Transport E E
Fold E E
Tongue Lift E E
Tongue
E E
Latch
Left Marker E
Right Marker E
Right Half
E E
Width
Left Half
E E
Width
CCS Fan E
KC01776,0001794 –19–19NOV03–1/1
240
10
1

012606
PN=287
240
10
2

012606
PN=288
Group 15A
Auxiliary Power Outlet Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
Electrical power is supplied to the Auxiliary Power Power and Pin 1 provides Ground to the Auxiliary
Connector through the 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and Power Connector, X106.
Accessory Outlet Connector at the rear of the tractor.
The Auxiliary Power Connector is provided on the Current entering the Frame Harness (W302) at X101,
machine to allow the operator the ability to add Pin 7 of the Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet flows
optional or additional equipment which needs electrical to Pin A of the Auxiliary Power Connector X106 on a
power with the Key Switch in the ON position. Red Wire. The ground circuit is completed through Pin
1 of the Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet which is
With the key switch in the ON position, Pin 7 of the connected by the Black Wire to Pin B of the Auxiliary
tractor 7 Pin connector, X101 provides +12 VDC Power Connector, X106.
OUO6046,0001872 –19–18APR02–1/1
240
15A
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15A-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=289
Auxiliary Power Outlet Diagnostics
Auxiliary Outlet Schematic
X101
7 pin Trailer Lighting
and Accessory Black (Ground)
1
Outlet 2
3
4
5
6
Red (Power)
7
X106
Red
A
Black
B
3 AUX POWER
W302
Frame Harness
–UN–15OCT03
240
A50836
15A DB Aux Power Schematic A50836
2 Oct 15, 2003 - 13:41 / APG
KC01776,00014E3 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=290
Group 15B
CCS Seed Delivery Agitator Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The CCS tank is equipped contains an agitation device Unit) S5. When the planter is lowered to the plant
which helps prevent “seed bridging” or “plugging” when position the CCS Push Button Shut Off Switch is
using heavily treated or inoculated seed. The agitation closed energizing the K31 CCS Agitator Motor Relay
device consists of a steel shaft with spring clips which allows the power to pass through the relay to
inserted through it and runs the width of the bottom of pin A of the F4 fuse at connector X108. Power passes
the tank. The shaft moves in a forward and reverse through the fuse and exits on pin B of X108 and on to
motion, similar to that of a windshield wiper shaft. In pin B of the Agitation Motor (M2). The motor is
order for the CCS Seed Delivery Agitator Motors to grounded through a ring terminal at X138 to a ground
run, the Tractor’s Key Switch must be in the ON wire with a ring terminal X140 which comes through
position and the Planter must be completely unfolded the CCS Connector X133 and back to the X101 (7 pin
and lowered to the ground. Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet.
Plant Lowered Mode With the Key Switch in the RUN Planter Raised Mode
position, 12 VDC supplied by the tractor flows through
connector X101 (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory When the planter is raised the CCS Push Button Shut
Outlet) on pin 7. It then routes to pin A of X133 at off Switch is opened and power no longer energizes
CCS connector. Power is then supplied to pin 30 of the K31 CCS Agitator Motor Relay causing power to
the K31 CCS Agitator Motor Relay and to pin A of be interrupted to the M2 Agitation Motor.
X135 at the CCS Push Button Shut Off Switch (Row
AG,KC01776,25 –19–19NOV99–1/1
240
15B
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15B-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=291
CCS Seed Delivery Agitator Diagnostics
Schematic
A53325 –UN–05DEC03
X101
S5
and Accessory CCS Push Button Shut
Outlet X133 Off Switch (Row Unit)
Red X135
A
Black (Ground) Black Red
1 B A
2 C Green
B
3
4
5
CCS Connecton
6
Red (Power)
7
K31
CCS Agitator F4
X139 Motor Relay Agitation Motor
X108 Fuse (15 Amp)
Red 87a
30 Red/Black Red
87 A
Black Green
86 85 Red
B
M2
Agitation Motor
X137
Red Black
B M
X138
X140
Black
W302 W303
Frame Harness CCS Harness
CCS Seed Delivery Agitator Motor

Dec 5, 2003 - 13:47 / A53325
HX05709,0004BF8 –19–14NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=292
Group 15C
CCS Low Tank Warning Diagnostics
Theory Of Operation
The low tank warning system alerts the operator when Frame Harness and flow through connector X103,
the bulk seed tanks are near empty by activating a red Frame Harness to Frame Control Console Extension
warning lamp on the Frame Control Console. Harness to Pin 18. In the Frame Control Console
Extension Harness, the Signal Wire and enters the
With the tractor key switch in the RUN position, Frame Control Console on Pin K.
12VDC flows on the Red Wire from connector X101
(7-Pin Trailer lighting and Accessory Outlet) on Pin 7 The Bin Level Sensors in each tank are optical
to the Frame Control Power Fuse F3 and on to X102, sensors. When the seed covers the face of the sensor,
Frame Control Console (Pin A) . Current also flows on the sensor allows current to flow on the signal wire,
the Red Wire to connectors X134, Left Bin Level equally supplying voltage (12VDC) to the Frame
Sensor (Pin 1) and X145, Right Bin Level Sensor (Pin Control Console. As either tank empties, and the face
1). of the sensor for either tank is uncovered, the current
flowing on the signal wire is reduced by the sensor to
The Ground Circuit is completed through The Black less than 0.5 VDC. As the current flow drops on either
Wire on Pin 1 of X101 (7-Pin Trailer Lighting and the Left or Right Bin Level Sensor to less than 0.5
Accessory Outlet). The Black Wire that enters X101 is VDC, the circuitry in the Bin Level Sensors causes the
connected to Pin 2 of X134, Left Bin Level Sensor, Pin voltage on the sensor wire leading into the Frame
2 of X145, Right Bin Level Sensor, and Pin J of X102, Control Console to drop to less than 0.5 VDC. The
Frame Control Console through Pin A of X103, Frame Lamp Drive Circuits on the Printed Circuit Board in the
Harness to Frame Control Console Extension Harness. Frame Control Console senses the loss of voltage
(less than 0.5 VDC) and turns ON the Row Lift
The Left Bin Level Sensor Lamp Signal exits Switch/Tank Low Warning Lamp when either one of
Connector X134 on (Pin 3) and the Right Bin Level the Sensors are covered. The optical sensors need to
Sensor Lamp Signal exits Connector X145 on the (Pin be kept clean for the system to work properly.
3). Both Signal Wires are spliced together in the
KC01776,0001353 –19–11JUN02–1/1
240
15C
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15C-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=293
CCS Low Tank Warning Diagnostics
Electrical Schematic
A53326 –UN–05DEC03
X101
and Accessory
Outlet X133
Red Red X140

A
Black (Ground) Black Black Black
1 B
2 Green Green
C
3
4
5 CCS Connecton
6
X416 Red (Power)
7
A301 B1
Frame Control Left Bin X134
Console Level Sensor
Green
C
Red
A
Black
B
+12 VDC Red Red Red
A 6
Ground Black Black Black
J 11 B2
Bin Sensor White/Black White/Black Blue/White
K 18 Right Bin X145
Level Sensor
X102 Green
Lamp C
X103 Red
Drive A
Circuit E307 18 Pin Connector B
Black
Tank Low
Warning
Lamp
W301
Frame Control W302 W303
Console Extension Frame Harness CCS Harness
Harness
DB CCS Bin Level Schematic

Dec 4, 2003 - 16:09 / APG A53326
HX05709,0004BF9 –19–14NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=294
Group 15D
CCS Planter Raise/Lower Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
Plant ModeThe Frame Control Console Switches (W301), and across Fuse. and on to the Frame Control
operate solenoid hydraulic valves. These solenoid Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows to the
valves prevent a cylinder from operating unless valves Plant/Transport Mode Switch (S101) on pin C. With the
are energized. The functions are selected with the Plant/Transport Mode Switch in the Plant position,
corresponding switches and controlled with the tractor electrical current exits the switch on pin 1 and flows to
selective control valve(s). pin 9 of the Machine Plant/Transport Mode Relay
(K30), flows through the relay, and exits on pin 1. 12
The operator can raise and lower the planter when it is VDC then exits the Frame Control Console through pin
unfolded to the field position by pressing the G of X102, travels across the Frame Control Console
PLANT-TRANS mode switch to the PLANT position Extension Harness, and enters the Frame Harness at
and activating the appropriate SCV. Each time the pin 4 of X103. Current out of connector X103 passes
planter is raised and the SCV is held in the raise through to (Pin 4) and on to the CCS Harness pin A of
position , the Center and Wing Wheel Cylinders X117. Power then is available at the CCS Fan Motor
re-phase. Shut Off Relay K32, pin 30. With the relay not
energized power passed through the relay and exits on
With the CCS Seed Delivery System, a hydraulically pin 87A and on to Pin A of the CCS Field/Plant
driven fan provides airflow for seed delivery from a Solenoid (Y14) allowing the planter to raise and lower
central tank to a hopper on the row unit. The metering when the proper SCV is activated. Field/Plant Solenoid
of the seed is still handled by a meter at the row unit (Y14) at connector X117 (Pin A) energizing the
to maintain consistent and accurate seed spacing. solenoid. The ground circuit for this solenoid goes from
CCS Seed Delivery acts as a tender for the row unit; It X117 (Pin B) and back to Pin 1 of the 7 pin Trailer
provides a small pool of seed at each row unit at all Lighting and Accessory Outlet X101 through the CCS
times to supply the need of the meter. In order for the Connector X133. Ground for the Relays also goes this
CCS Seed Delivery Fan to turn, the Tractor’s Key same path.
Switch must be in the ON position, planter must be
completely unfolded and lowered to the ground. Also, Purge Hoses Mode For Clean Out purposes, the CCS
the Tractor’s SCV associated with the Field Seed Delivery Fan can be turned on while the Planter
Raise/Lower circuit must be in the Planter Lower is fully raised. This is done by selecting PLANT on the
Detent and supplying Continuous Hydraulic Flow. Plant/Transport Mode Switch (S101) of the Frame
Control Console, PURGE HOSES on the CCS Clean
With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC Out Switch located near the Vacuum Gauge on the
supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101 planter, and positioning the Tractor’s SCV associated
(7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7 with the Field Raise/Lower Circuit to the Planter Lower
(Red Wire). It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into Detent. This supplies Continuous Hydraulic Flow to the
the Frame Control Console Extension Harness Fan without lowering the planter.
240
15D
1
Continued on next page AG,KC01776,25CONV1 –19–19NOV99–1/2
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15D-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=295
If the customer wants to clean out the CCS tanks and Connector X133 is sent to the CCS Fan Motor Shut
hoses he needs to be able to have the planter in the Off Relay (K32) to energize which opens up the power
raised position and operate the CCS Fan. Since the to the CCS Field Raise/Lower Solenoid (Y14) not
CCS fan only operates through the SCV as the planter allowing the planter to lower. At the same time the
raise lower (SCV locked in lower detent) the CCS Field Clean Out Mode Relay (K34) is energized allowing
Raise/Lower Solenoid must be deactivated. With the power to be supplied to the CCS Seed Delivery Fan
planter is in the up position for clean out, the CCS Hydraulic Motor Solenoid (S14) allowing the motor to
Push Button Shut Off Switch (S5) is open and the run. The ground circuit for this solenoid goes from
CCS Fan is not running. The operator would then X117 (Pin B) and back to Pin 1 of the 7 pin Trailer
switch (close) the CCS Clean Out Manual Switch (S8) Lighting and Accessory Outlet X101 through the CCS
located by the Vacuum Gauge. Current from this Connector X133. Ground for the Relays also goes this
closed switch, which is being supplied by the CCS same path.
AG,KC01776,25CONV1 –19–19NOV99–2/2
240
15D
2

012606
PN=296
A53327 –UN–05DEC03
S5
X133 CCS Push Button
7 pin Trailer Lighting K32
CCS Fan Motor Shut Off Switch
and Accessory Red Red (Row Unit)
A301 A Shut Off Relay
Outlet Black (Ground) Black Black
Frame Control Console 1 B Blue/White
2
Pink
30 87a
C Black 87
3 Red
Black Blue A
4 86 85 Green
S101 5 B
Plant / Transport CCS Connecton X138
6 S8
Switch Red (Power) X135
7
X144 CCS Clean Out
Switch (Manual)
Transport
3 (Plant-Clean Out /
12 Volts
C Plant Plant Purge Hoses)
1
K30 F3
Fuse K34 Red
Plant / Transport A
Clean Out Mode
Relay Green
B
Plant Relay
X132
Red 87a X141
30 Green
Plant Field/Plant B A 87
1 X102 Black
9 Blue Y3
5 86 85
CCS Seed Delivery Fan
12 Volts Red Red Red Hydraulic Motor Solenoid
2 A 6
10 Blue Blue Blue Green
6 G 4 14 Field/Plant X143 A
Black
B
3
11 X142
7 X103
Green Red
4 18 Pin Connector A
12 Black
8 B Y14
CCS Field/Plant Solenoid
13 14
X117
Green
W301 A
Black
Frame B
Control W302 W303
Console Frame Harness CCS Harness X117
Extension
Harness
CCS Seed Delivery Fan Diagnostics DB

Dec 4, 2003 - 10:28 / APG A53327
HX05709,0004BFA –19–14NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=297
240
15D
4

012606
PN=298
Group 15E
CCS Seed Delivery Fan Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
Plant Mode With the CCS Seed Delivery System, a Purge Hoses Mode For Clean Out purposes, the CCS
hydraulically driven fan provides airflow for seed Seed Delivery Fan can be turned on while the Planter
delivery from a central tank to a hopper on the row is fully raised. This is done by selecting PLANT on the
unit. The metering of the seed is still handled by a Plant/Transport Mode Switch (S101) of the Frame
meter at the row unit to maintain consistent and Control Console, PURGE HOSES on the CCS Clean
accurate seed spacing. CCS Seed Delivery acts as a Out Switch located near the Vacuum Gauge on the
tender for the row unit; It provides a small pool of seed planter, and positioning the Tractor’s SCV associated
at each row unit at all times to supply the need of the with the Field Raise/Lower Circuit to the Planter Lower
meter. In order for the CCS Seed Delivery Fan to turn, Detent. This supplies Continuous Hydraulic Flow to the
the Tractor’s Key Switch must be in the ON position, Fan without lowering the planter
planter must be completely unfolded and lowered to
the ground. Also, the Tractor’s SCV associated with If the customer wants to clean out the CCS tanks and
the Field Raise/Lower circuit must be in the Planter hoses he needs to be able to have the planter in the
Lower Detent and supplying Continuous Hydraulic raised position and operate the CCS Fan. Since the
Flow. CCS fan only operates through the SCV as the planter
raise lower (SCV locked in lower detent) the CCS
With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC Field/Plant Solenoid (which allows the planter to lower)
supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101 must be deactivated. With the planter is in the up
(7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7. position for clean out, the CCS Push Button Shut Off
It then routes to the CCS Push Button Shut Off Switch Switch (S5) is open and the CCS Fan is not running.
(S5) on pin A of X135 and also to the CCS Clean Out The operator would then switch (close) the CCS Clean
Switch (S8) as well as to Pin 30 of the Clean Out Out Manual Switch (S8) located by the Vacuum
Mode Relay (K34). When the Planter is completely Gauge. This will cause the CCS Fan Motor Shut Off
unfolded and lowered power passes through the (S5) Relay (K32) to energize which opens up the power to
switch and on to the CCS Seed Delivery Fan Hydraulic the CCS Field/Plant Solenoid ( S14) not allowing the
Motor Solenoid (Y3) allowing the fan to run. When the planter to lower. At the same time the Clean Out Mode
planter is raised the CCS Push Button Shut Off Switch Relay (K34) is energized allowing power to be supplied
(S5) opens and shuts off power to the CCS Seed to the CCS Seed Delivery Fan Hydraulic Motor
Delivery Fan Hydraulic Motor Solenoid (Y14) stopping Solenoid (Y3) allowing the motor to run.
the fan and allowing the oil that was used for the fan
to be used for the other hydraulic functions of the
planter such as raise and lower.
240
15E
1
AG,KC01776,25CONV2 –19–19NOV99–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15E-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=299
CCS Seed Delivery Fan Diagnostics
A53329 –UN–05DEC03
S5
X133 CCS Push Button
7 pin Trailer Lighting K32
CCS Fan Motor Shut Off Switch
and Accessory Red Red (Row Unit)
A301 A Shut Off Relay
Outlet Black (Ground) Black Black
Frame Control Console 1 B Blue/White
2
Pink
30 87a
C Black 87 Red
3 A
Black Blue
4 86 85 Green
S101 5 B
Plant / Transport CCS Connecton X138
6 S8
Switch Red (Power) X135
7
X144 CCS Clean Out
Switch (Manual)
Transport
3 (Plant-Clean Out /
12 Volts
C Plant Plant Purge Hoses)
1
K30 F3
Fuse K34 Red
Plant / Transport A
Clean Out Mode
Relay Green
B
Plant Relay
X132
Red 87a X141
30 Green
Plant Field/Plant B A 87
1 X102
9 Black Blue Y3
5 86 85
12 Volts Red Red Red Hydraulic Motor Solenoid
2 A 6
10 Blue Blue Blue Green
6 G 4 14 Field/Plant X143 A
Black
B
3
11 X142
7 X103
Green Red
4 18 Pin Connector A
12 Black
8 B Y14
CCS Field Raise/Lower Solenoid
13 14
X117
Green
W301 A
Black
Frame B
Control W302 W303
Console Frame Harness CCS Harness X117
Extension
Harness
CCS Seed Delivery Fan Diagnostics DB

Dec 5, 2003 - 13:56 / APG A53329
HX05709,0004BFC –19–14NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=300
Group 15F
CCS Tank Fill Lights Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
Electrical power is supplied to the CCS Tank Fill Lights Outlet Connector provides +12 VDC Power on the Red
through Pin 2 of the 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and Wire while Pin 1 provides Ground on the Black Wire to
Accessory Outlet Connector at the rear of the tractor. the “Aux. Lights” Connector X146.
Pin 2 of the 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory
Outlet Connector is powered whenever the tractor light Current exiting Pin 2, of the 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and
switch is in a position to allow the flood lights to come Accessory Outlet (X101) flows to Pin A of the “Aux.
on. On most tractors, Power is available on Pin 2 of Lights” Connector X146. Power from Pin A (X146)
the 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet travels to the CCS Tank Fill Light Switch on the Red
Connector whenever the tractor light switch is in either Wire and enters S110 on Pin A (X349). When the CCS
the Field 1 or Field 2 position. Refer to the Operators Tank Fill Light Switch is in the ON Position, 12VDC
Manual of the tractor you are using for details of the flows to both CCS Tank Fill Lamps on Pin A,
light switch position required to get power to the CCS illuminating the Lamps. The ground circuit is completed
Tank Fill Lights (Pin 2). by the Black Wire which extends from each Tank Fill
Lamp, X347 and X348 (Pin B), through the “Aux.
The “Aux. Lights” Connector is provided on the Lights” Connector, X146 (Pin B) and into the 7 Pin
machine to give the operator the ability to add optional Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet Connector, X101
or additional field/flood lights on the planter. (Pin 1).
With the Tractor Light Switch in the proper position,

Pin 2 of the 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory
OUO6046,0001872CONV1 –19–18APR02–1/1
240
15F
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15F-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=301
CCS Tank Fill Lights Diagnostics
W302 W304
Frame CCS Tank Fill
Harness Lights Harness
S110
CCS Tank
Fill Light
Switch
Aux Lights
X349
7 pin Trailer Red Red Red Red
2 A A
Lighting and Black Black Black Red
B
1 B
Accessory Outlet
X101 X146 E305

CCS Tank Fill
X 347
Lamp #1
Red
A
Black
B
E306
CCS Tank Fill
X 348
Lamp #2
Red
A
Black
B
240
15F
2 –UN–13NOV03
CCS Tank Fill Lights Schematic

Nov 13, 2003 - 12:33 / A53328
A53328
HX05709,0004BFB –19–14NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=302
Group 15G
Field Raise-Lower Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid (Red Wire). It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a the Frame Control Console Extension Harness
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. (W301), and across the Fuse and enters the Frame
The functions are selected with the corresponding Control Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows
switches and controlled with the tractor selective to the Plant/Transport Mode Switch (S101) on pin C.
control valve(s). With the Plant/Transport Mode Switch in the Plant
position, electrical current exits the switch on pin 1 and
The operator can raise and lower the planter when it is flows to pin 9 of the Machine Plant/Transport Mode
unfolded to the field position by pressing the Relay (K30), flows through the relay, and exits on pin
PLANT-TRANS mode switch to the PLANT position 1. 12 VDC then exits the Frame Control Console
and activating the appropriate SCV. Each time the through pin G of X102 on and travels across the
planter is raised and the SCV is held in the raise Frame Control Console Extension Harness, and enters
position , the Center and Wing Wheel Cylinders the Frame Harness at pin 4 of X103. Current out of
re-phase. connector X103 passes through Pin 4 and on to the
Field/Plant Solenoid (Y14) at connector X117 (Pin A)
With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC energizing the solenoid. The ground circuit for this
supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101 solenoid goes from X117 (Pin B) and back to Pin 1 of
(7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7 the 7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet X101.
HX05709,0001D04 –19–22AUG01–1/1
240
15G
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15G-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=303
Field Raise-Lower Diagnostics
Field Raise Lower Schematic

A50837 –UN–05DEC03
A301
Frame Control Console
X101
S101 7 pin Trailer Lighting
Plant / Transport
and Accessory Black
Switch 1
Outlet 2
3
Transport
12 Volts
3 4
C Plant Plant 5
1
6
Red
7
K30
Plant / Transport
Relay
Plant F3
Fuse
Plant Field/Plant
1 X132
9
5
X102
B A
2
10
6
12 Volts Red Red Red
3 A 6
Blue Blue Blue
11 G 4 Y14
7 14 Field/Plant
Field/Plant
4 Solenoid
12
8 X103
18 Pin Connector Green
13 14 A
Black
B
X117
W301
Frame
Control W302
Console Frame Harness
Extension
Harness
DB Field Raise Lower Schematic A50837

Dec 4, 2003 - 16:12 / APG
KC01776,00014E4 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=304
Group 15H
Half Width Disconnect Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The operator has the ability to disconnect the drive on enters X111, Right Clutch Harness and on to pin A of
the right side or left side of the machine for planting X121 at the clutch (Y8) to disengaging the clutch. If
point rows. The right clutch(s) are disengaged by the machine is equipped with 4 clutches the power is
pressing the R-L Half Width Disconnect Clutch Mode also supplied to the 2nd Right Clutch (Y15) pin A of
Switch to the R position and the left clutch(s) are X122 to disengage it at well. The ground circuit is
disengaged by pressing the R-L Half Width Disconnect completed from Pin B on the connectors on the
Clutch Mode Switch to the L position. When 12 VDC Clutches (X121 and X122) and travels through
are sent to the clutches, they disengage. Larger connector X111 Clutch Harness back to the X101 (7
planters have the option of having 2 Right Clutches pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet).
and 2 Left Clutches.
Left Clutch(s)
NOTE: A planter equipped with Variable Rate Drive
with a three motor drive system has a option With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC
of being able to disconnect the drive to one supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101
third of the planter at a time. The operator has (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7
the option of disconnecting the right, center or (Red Wire). It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into
left wing sections of the planter. Since this is the Frame Control Console Extension Harness
part of the SeedStar Variable Rate System this (W301), and across Fuse (F3) as cc# 12A. CC# 12A
information will be covered in the SeedStar enters the Frame Control Console on pin A of X102. It
Variable Rate Technical Manual. then flows to the Right/Left Half Width Disconnect
Switch (S103) on pin C. With the Right/Left Clutch
Right Clutch(s) Disengage Switch (S103) in the Left detent, electrical
current exits the switch on pin 1. The Left side of the
With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC switch will illuminate. 12 VDC from the Right/Left Half
supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101 Width Disconnect Switch exits the Frame Control
(7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7. Console through pin N of X102 on cc# LCR, travels
It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into the Frame across the Frame Control Console Extension Harness,
Control Console Extension Harness (W301), and and enters the Frame Harness on pin 14 of X103
across Fuse (F3) and enters the Frame Control (White). The White Wire enters X112, Left Clutch
Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows to the Harness and on to pin A of X123 at the clutch (Y9) to
Right/Left Half Width Disconnect Switch (S103) on pin disengaging the clutch. If the machine is equipped with
C. With the Right/Left Half Width Clutch Disengage 4 clutches the power is also supplied to the 2nd Left
Switch (S103) in the Right detent, electrical current Clutch (Y16) pin A of X124 to disengage it at well. The
exits the switch on pin 1. The Right side of the switch ground circuit is completed from Pin B on the
will illuminate. 12 VDC from the Right/Left Clutch connectors on the Clutches (X123 and X124) and
Disengage Switch exits the Frame Control Console travels through connector X112 Clutch Harness back
240
through pin M of X102 and travels across the Frame to the X101 (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory 15H
Control Console Extension Harness, and enters the Outlet). 1
Frame Harness on pin 12 of X103. The Wire then
HX05709,0001D04CONV1 –19–22AUG01–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15H-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=305
Half Width Disconnect Diagnostics
Half Width Disconnect Schematic

A50839 –UN–05DEC03
X101
and Accessory Black
1
Outlet 2
3
4
5
6 Note:
Red
7 Harness used
with 4 clutch
A301 System Y15
Frame Control Console Right
X122
Clutch #2
Red
A
Black
B
F3
Fuse Y8
8 Right Clutch Right
X132 X121
Clutch #1
Green Red Red
B A A A
X102 Black
B
Black Black
B
X111 Y9
A 6 Left
Ground Black Black Black
J 11 Clutch #1
Right Clutch Gray Gray Gray
M 12 Green Red
Left Clutch White White White
N 14 A Red A
Black Black
B Black B
X112
X103 X123
18 Pin Connector 9 Left Clutch Note:
S103 Harness used
Half Width with 4 clutch
Disconnect W301 System Y16
(Clutch) Switch Frame Left
Ground Control Clutch #2
3
Console Red
12 Volts Right Right Clutch Dis W302 A
1 Extension Black
C Left Clutch Dis Harness Frame Harness W303 B
2
Left Half Width
Ground Dissconect
4 X124
Harness
DB Half Width Schematic A50839
Dec 5, 2003 - 13:01 / APG
KC01776,00014E6 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=306
Group 15I
Lighting Overall Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
This machine is equipped with warning lights, tail through pin B of X126 of the Right Hazard Lamp and
lamps, and turn signals used to alert approaching also pin D of X126 at the Flasher Module.
traffic of the machine’s presence. The lighting harness
plugs directly into the planter’s frame harness. The Steady current enters through connector X101 on pin 3
frame harness which is plugged into the 7 pin Trailer as a Yellow Wire, routes through pin D of X119. The
Lighting and Accessory Outlet, extends the turn signal, steady current is then distributed to pin A of X129 at
warning and tail light circuits to the rear of the planter. the Left Red Tail Lamp, pin B of X131 at the Left
Amber Hazard Lamp, and pin C of X125 at the Flasher
Using the lighting controls and turn signals in the Module (A302).
tractor, the operator controls the lighting on the planter.
The lighting system includes turn signals, tail, and In the flasher module, steady current from the Yellow
warning lights. Wire closes the relay and creates ground circuits at
pins E and B for the Grn/Blk and Yel/Blk Wires.
A lighting enhancement module (Flasher Module A302)
has been incorporated into the lighting circuit. This Grounded by the Grn/Blk Wire, flashing current on the
module causes red tail lights to function as turn Green Wire is allowed to flow and flash the Right Red
signals. During normal transport, both amber lights will Tail Lamp (E302).
flash in unison at high intensity and both red lamps will
illuminate steady at low intensity. Grounded by the Yel/Blk Wire, steady current on the
Yellow Wire is allowed to flow and steadily illuminate
When a turn is signaled, the red tail lamp in direction the Left Red Tail Lamp (E303).
of turn will flash at high intensity in unison with the
amber lamp. The opposite side amber and red lamps Left Turn:
will illuminate steady at high intensity.
Flashing current enters through connector X101 on pin
Power for the individual lighting circuits is supplied 3 as a Yellow Wire, routes through pin D of X119 and
through the 7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet passes through pin A of X129 at the Left Red Tail
connector. The Black Ground Wire enters on pin 1 of Lamp (E303), pin B of X130 at the Left Amber Hazard
X101, routes through pin C of X119. It is then Lamp (E304), and pin C of X125 at the Flasher
distributed to each component on the harness Module (A302).
including the Flasher Module, Right Amber Hazard
Lamp, Right Red Tail Lamp, Left Red Tail Lamp, and Steady current enters through connector X101 on pin 5
the Left Amber Hazard Lamp. as a Brown Wire, routes through pin B of X119 and
leaves as a Green wire. The steady current is then
Current for the tail lights enters through connector distributed to pin A of X128 at the Right Red Tail Lamp
X101 on pin 6, routes through pin A of X119. It is then (E302), pin B of X126 at the Right Amber Hazard
240
distributed to pin B of X128 at the Right Red Tail Lamp Lamp (E301), and pin D of X125 at the Flasher 15I
and pin B of X129 at the Left Red Tail Lamp. The Module (A302). 1
current to the tail lights does not change when any of
the other lighting functions are used. In the flasher module, steady current from the Green
Wire closes the relay and creates ground circuits at
Right Turn: pins E and B for the Grn/Blk and Yel/Blk Wires.
Flashing current enters through connector X101 on pin

5 and routes through pin B of X119 and passes
Continued on next page HX05709,0001D04CONV2 –19–22AUG01–1/2
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15I-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=307
Grounded by the Yel/Blk Wire, flashing current on the Grounded by the Grn/Blk Wire, steady current on the
Yellow Wire is allowed to flow and flash the Left Red Green Wire is allowed to flow and steadily illuminate
Tail Lamp (E303). the Right Red Tail Lamp (E302).
HX05709,0001D04CONV2 –19–22AUG01–2/2
240
15I
2

012606
PN=308
Light Schematic
A50840 –UN–15OCT03
A302 X125
Flasher Module
Black
A Grn. and Black
E Yel. and Black
B E301
X126 Right Amber
Hazard
Lamp
Green
Yellow B
C Black
Green
R D A
X127
E302
Right Red
X101 15 Road Lights Tail Lamp
Green / Black
7 pin Trailer Lighting D
Green
A
and Accessory Black - Ground Black Black - Ground Brown
1 C B
Outlet White Yellow - Left Turn Black
2 D C
Yellow - Left Turn Red Green - Right Turn
3 B
Green Brown -Tail
4 A X128
Brown - Right Turn
5
6 Green
7 X119 X129
Yellow / Black
Yellow
D
Brown
A
Black
B
C
E303
Left Red
Tail Lamp
X130
Yellow
B
Black
A
E304
X131 Left Amber
Hazard
W304 Lamp
W301
Lighting Harness
Frame Harness
(Road Lights)
DB Lighting Schematic A50840

Lighting Harness
Oct 1, 2003 - 15:08 / APG
KC01776,00014E7 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=309
240
15I
4

012606
PN=310
Group 15J
Machine Fold-Unfold Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7.
The functions are selected with the corresponding It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into the Frame
switches and controlled with the tractor selective Control Console Extension Harness W301, and across
control valve(s). Fuse (F3) and enters the Frame Control Console
(A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows to the
For ease of transportation, the planter’s wings fold Plant/Transport Mode Switch (S101) on pin C. With the
forward to the transport position and the machine is Plant/Transport Mode Switch in the TRANS position,
towed like a two-wheeled cart behind the tractor. The electrical current exits the switch on pin 3 and flows
machine is folded by pressing the PLANT-TRANS into the Fold/Transport Lift Switch (S102). With the
(S101) mode switch to the TRANS position, holding Fold/Transport Lift Switch in the FOLD mode current
the FOLD-TRANSPORT LIFT (S102) mode switch to then exits the switch on pin 1 and is available at pin D
the FOLD mode detent, and activating the #2 SCV of X102. Current exits the Frame Control Box on Pin D
until the machine is folded. Once folded, the Planter X102 and through the Frame Control Extension
Hitch can be raised and the Tongue Latch can be Harness on pin 10 of X103. At the Frame Harness
Latched and the Wing Wheels can then be retracted to connector X103 current is then available to both of the
ready the planter to be transported. The rear of the Fold Solenoids (Y6 and Y7 ) on Pin A of X109 and
planter can then be raised for additional transport X110 allowing current to be available to energize the
clearance. fold solenoids. The ground circuit is completed by Pin
B of both X109 and X110 Fold Solenoid connectors to
Unfolding the planter requires the machine to be be connected to pin 1 of X101 (7 pin Trailer Lighting
lowered out of Transport Lift, Wing Wheels Lowered, and Accessory Outlet).
Tongue Latch unlatched, Hitch lowered and the #2
SCV activated to unfold the planter.
HX05709,0001D04CONV3 –19–22AUG01–1/1
240
15J
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15J-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=311
Machine Fold-Unfold Diagnostics
Fold Schematic
A50838 –UN–05DEC03
A301
X101
Plant / Transport and Accessory Black
Switch 1
Outlet 2
3
Transport Trans
12 Volts
3 4
C Plant 5
1
6
Red
7
Trans F3
Fuse
X132
S102
X102 B A Y6
Fold/Transport Lift
6 Fold 1 Fold
Switch
Solenoid #1
A 6 Green
Fold Fold Fold Brown Brown White/Black
1 D 10 A
Trans Black
C B
3
Transport Lift
X103 X109
18 Pin Connector Y7
7 Fold 2 Fold
Solenoid #2
Green
A
Black
B
W301
Frame Control X110
Console W302
Extension Frame Harness
Harness
DB Fold Schematic A50838

Dec 4, 2003 - 16:13 / APG
KC01776,00014E5 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=312
Group 15K
Marker Raise-Lower - Manual Mode Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid Machine Plant/Transport Mode Relay (K30) where it
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a enters on pin 11 and exits on pin 3. Current then
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. enters the Auto/Manual Marker Mode Switch (S106) on
The functions are selected with the corresponding pin C. With the AUTO-MAN marker mode switch in the
switches and controlled with the tractor selective MAN position, electrical current exits the switch on pin
control valve(s). 1 and flows into pin C of the Right/Left Marker Switch
(S105).
This machine is equipped with a left and right hand
marker system. Mounted to the end of each marker Left Marker Raise/Lower:
arm is a marker disk. As the planter is pulled through When the Right/Left Marker Switch (S103) is
the field with one of the two markers in the unfolded positioned to the Left Marker detent, the left side of the
position, the marker disk creates a small furrow in the switch illuminates and electrical current exits the switch
soil. As the operator turns the machine around on the on pin 2. 12 VDC then exits the Frame Control
headland and lines up for the next pass through the Console (A301) through pin R of X102 and travels
field, the furrow created by the marker disk is used as across the Frame Control Console Extension Harness
a guideline for the operator to follow. The operator (W301), and enters the Frame Harness (W302) on pin
lines up the marker furrow with the center of the tractor 17 of X103. This Wire enters pin A of X104 of the Left
and maintains this path. Marker Solenoid (Y1) to energize the solenoid. The
Ground circuit is completed from Pin B of X104 Left
The Manual Marker Mode is selected by pressing the Marker Solenoid and back to pin 1 of X101 (7 pin
AUTO-MAN marker mode switch (S106) to the MAN Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet).
position. The marker hydraulics use a separate SCV,
the selected marker on the Right/Left Marker Switch Right Marker Raise/Lower:
(S105) of the Frame Control Console will raise and When the Right/Left Marker Switch (S103) is
lower each time the designated SCV for extending and positioned to the Right Marker detent, the right side of
retracting the markers is activated. In order for the the switch illuminates and electrical current exits the
MAN Marker Mode to function, the TRANS-PLANT switch on pin 1. 12 VDC then exits the Frame Control
mode switch (S101) must be in the PLANT position. Console (A301) through pin P of X102 and travels
across the Frame Control Console Extension Harness
With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC (W301), and enters the Frame Harness (W302) on pin
supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101 16 of X103. This Wire enters pin A of X105 of the
(7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7. Right Marker Solenoid (Y2) to energize the solenoid.
It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into the Frame The Ground circuit is completed from Pin B of X105
Control Console Extension Harness (W301), and Right Marker Solenoid and back to pin 1 of X101 (7
across Fuse (F3) and enters the Frame Control pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet).
Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows to the
240
15K
1
Continued on next page HX05709,0001D04CONV4 –19–22AUG01–1/2
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15K-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=313
Auto Marker Raise/Lower: of either the Left Marker Solenoid X104 or the Right
When the Auto/Manual Marker Mode Switch (S106) is Marker Solenoid X105 to energize the solenoid. As the
positioned to the Auto Marker detent, electrical current planter frame raises and lowers one of the row units
exits the switch on pin 3. 12 VDC then exits the Frame contact the Auto Marker Switch (Dimmer Switch)
Control Console (A301) through pin S of X102 and causing the switch to switch power between terminal C
travels across the Frame Control Console Extension and B causing the Markers to Alternate every time the
Harness (W301), and enters the Frame Harness planter is raised and lowered to the ground. The
(W302) on pin 15 of X103. This Wire enters pin A of Ground circuit is completed with Pin B of X104 and
X115 Auto Marker Switch (Dimmer Switch) (S104) X105 of the Right and Left Solenoid Connectors back
located on the frame. Power then is routed to Pin B or to pin 1 of X101 (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory
Pin C of the Auto Marker Switch and goes to the pin A Outlet).
HX05709,0001D04CONV4 –19–22AUG01–2/2
240
15K
2

012606
PN=314
Marker Schematic
A50866 –UN–05DEC03
X101
7 pin Trailer Lighting Left
A301 and Accessory Black
Frame Control Console 1
Outlet Right
2 16 Dimmer
X120
3
4 X118
Red
5 A
Red
6 Red
C
12 Volts Red A Black
S101 7 Black Black C
Plant / Transport C
Green Green Green B A
Switch B B
X104
Transport Trans Green S104
12 Volts 3 A Y1 Auto Marker
C Plant Plant Black Left Marker
1 B Switch
Solenoid (Dimmer Switch)
1 Left Marker X105

Green
K30 A Y2
Plant / Transport Black Right Marker
B
Relay F3 Solenoid
Fuse
12 Volts
1 2 Right Marker
9 X132
5 S106 S105
Auto / Manual Left / Right Marker X102 B A
2 Marker Mode
10 Switch
6 Switch
3 12 Volts Red
Red Red
3 12 Volts Right A 6
11 Ground Black Black Black
7 12 Volts Manual 1 J 11
1 C Right Marker Orange Orange Green/White
C 2 P 16
4 Left Left Marker Yellow Yellow White/Red
3 R 17
12 Auto Auto Marker Mode Green Green Red/Black
8 4 S 15
13 14
X103
18 Pin Connector
Y301
Y305
Frame Control
Y302 Auto Marker
Console
Frame Harness (Dimmer)
Extension
Harness
Harness
DB Marker Schematic A50866

Dec 5, 2003 - 13:18 / APG
KC01776,00014E8 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=315
240
15K
4

012606
PN=316
Group 15L
Tongue Latch Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a (Red Wire). It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. the Frame Control Console Extension Harness
The functions are selected with the corresponding (W301), and across Fuse (F3) and enters the Frame
switches and controlled with the tractor selective Control Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows
control valve(s). to the Machine Plant/Transport Mode Relay (K30)
where it enters on pin 11 and exits on pin 7. Current
The Tongue Latch allows the wings of the planter to then enters the TONGUE LIFT/LATCH Switch (S107)
be latched to the tongue of the planter when it is on pin C. With the TONGUE LIFT/LATCH Switch in
folded. This allows the planter wing frames to be the LATCH position, electrical current exits the switch
secured to the planter tongue when the machine is on pin 2 and flows into pin H of X102 of the Frame
transported. Control Console Extension Harness (W301). Current is
then available at Pin 5 of X103 of the Frame Harness
The Tongue Latch Mode is selected by pressing the (W302) and is then supplied to Pin A of both X115
TONGUE LIFT/LATCH switch (S107) to the LATCH Tongue Latch #1 and X116 Tongue Latch #2
Detent Position and operating the #2 SCV. In order for Solenoids. The ground circuit is completed from Pin B
the TONGUE Latch mode to function, the of both X115 Tongue Latch #1 and X116 Tongue
TRANS-PLANT mode switch (S101) must be in the Latch #2 Solenoids back to Pin 1 of the 7 pin Trailer
TRANS position. Lighting and Accessory Outlet.
With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC

supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101
AG,KC01776,25CONV3 –19–19NOV99–1/1
240
15L
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15L-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=317
Tongue Latch Schematic

A50867 –UN–05DEC03
A301
X101
S101
Plant / Transport
Switch and Accessory Black
1
Outlet 2
3
Transport Trans
12 Volts
3 4
C Plant Plant 5
1
6
Red
7
Trans
1
9
5
F3
2 Fuse
10
6
X132
12 Volts 3
11
7 B A
4 X102
12 12 Tongue Latch 1
8
X115
Trans 12 Volts Red Red Red Y12
13 14 A 6
Tongue Latch Green/White Green/White Orange Green Tongue
H 5 A
Ground Ground Black Black Black Black Latch
J 11 B
K30 Solenoid #1
Plant / Transport S107
Relay Tongue Lift/Latch X103
Switch
18 Pin Connector
Tongue Latch W301 13 Tongue Latch 2

2
C Frame X116
1 Control
Green Y13
Console A Tongue
Extension Black
B Latch
Harness Solenoid #2
W302
Frame Harness
DB Tongue Latch Schematic A50867
Dec 4, 2003 - 16:18 / APG
KC01776,00014E9 –19–20DEC02–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15L-2 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=318
Group 15M
Tongue Lift Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid switch (S107) to the Lift Detent Position and operating
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a the #2 SCV. In order for the TONGUE Lift mode to
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. function, the TRANS-PLANT mode switch (S101) must
The functions are selected with the corresponding be in the TRANS position.
switches and controlled with the tractor selective
control valve(s). With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC
supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101
The Tongue Lift allows the Tongue of the planter to be (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7.
raised and lowered to allow the planter tongue to come It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into the Frame
in contact with the wing frames so that planter can be Control Console Extension Harness (W301), and
latched for transport. Planters have the option to have across Fuse (F3) and enters the Frame Control
this hydraulic function of the Tongue Lift to be on a Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows to the
separate independent SCV or to use the same #2 Machine Plant/Transport Mode Relay (K30) where it
SCV, which is used for other functions on the planter, enters on pin 11 and exits on pin 7. Current then
for Tongue Lift. enters the TONGUE LIFT/LATCH Switch (S107) on pin
C. With the TONGUE LIFT/LATCH Switch in the LIFT
If a Separate SCV is used for this function no Solenoid position, electrical current exits the switch on pin 1 and
Valves are used and no electrical power is needed to flows into pin L of X102 of the Frame Control Console
raise and lower the Tongue. With this option the Extension Harness (W301). Current is then available at
hydraulic hoses of the Tongue Lift Cylinder are simply Pin 8 of X103 of the Frame Harness (W302) and is
plugged into the separate SCV and the SCV lever is then supplied to Pin A of both X113 Tongue Lift #1
used to raise and lower the Tongue. and X114 Tongue Lift #2 Solenoids. The ground circuit
is completed from Pin B of both X113 Tongue Lift #1
If the #2 SCV option is used for the Tongue Lift Mode and X114 Tongue Lift #2 Solenoids back to Pin 1 of
is selected by pressing the TONGUE LIFT/LATCH the 7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet.
AG,KC01776,25CONV4 –19–19NOV99–1/1
240
15M
1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15M-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=319
Tongue Lift Schematic

A50868 –UN–05DEC03
12 Volts X101
Plant / Transport
and Accessory Black
Switch 1
Outlet 2
3
Transport Trans
12 Volts 3 4
C Plant Plant 5
1
6
Red
7
Trans
1
9
5
2
10 F3
6
Fuse
12 Volts 3
11 X132
7
4 B A
12
8 X102
Trans 13 14
A 6 10 Tongue Lift 1
Ground Ground Black Black Black
J 11 X113
Tongue Lift Red/White Red/White Red/White
K30 L 8 Y10
Green
Plant / Transport A
Black Tongue
Relay S107 B Lift #1
Tongue Lift/Latch X103
Switch 18 Pin Connector
11 Tongue Lift 2
2 X114
C Tongue Lift
1 F301
Green Y11
Frame A
Control Black Tongue
B
Console Lift #2
Extension
Harness F302
Frame Harness
DB Tongue Lift Schematic A50868

Dec 4, 2003 - 16:19 / APG
KC01776,00014EA –19–20DEC02–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15M-2 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=320
Group 15N
Transport Lift Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a supplied by the tractor flows through connector X101
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. (7 pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet) on pin 7.
The functions are selected with the corresponding It then routes through pin 6 of X103, into the Frame
switches and controlled with the tractor selective Control Console Extension Harness (W301), and
control valve(s). across Fuse (F3) and enters the Frame Control
Console (A301) on pin A of X102. It then flows to Pin
The Transport Lift Cylinders are actually made C of the Plant/Transport Switch (S101). With the
together with the Planter Raise/Lower Cylinders. Even Plant/Transport Switch in the TRANSPORT position
though they share a common cylinder barrel they current then is available on Pin 3 of that switch.
operate as two entirely different cylinders. They both Current then continues on to Pin C of the
have separate cylinder rods and pistons and operate Fold/Transport Lift Switch (S102). With the
separately. The Planter Raise/Lower cylinder pushes Fold/Transport Lift Switch in the TRANSPORT LIFT
down to raise the planter in the field and the Transport mode current is then available at pin 3 of this switch
Lift cylinders pushes up to allow the planter frame to and on to pin E of X102 Frame Control Console
be raised higher for Transport. The Transport Lift Extension Harness (W301). Current then passes
switch and Solenoids direct the oil to allow the rear of through the Frame Control Console Extension Harness
the planter to be raised when the planter is in the through Pin 9 of X103 and on to the Frame Harness
Transport position providing additional road clearance (W302). It is then available at Pin A of both X107 of
when transporting. the Transport Lift #1 Solenoid and X108 Transport Lift
#2 Solenoid allowing the Solenoids to be energized.
The Transport Lift Mode is selected by pressing the The ground circuit is completed from Pin B of both
FOLD/TRANSPORT LIFT switch (S102) to the X117 Transport Lift #1 and X118 Transport Lift #2
TRANSPORT LIFT Detent Position and operating the Solenoids back to Pin 1 of the 7 pin Trailer Lighting
#2 SCV. In order for the TRANSPORT LIFT mode to and Accessory Outlet.
function, the PLANT/TRANSPORT mode switch (S101)
must be in the TRANS position.
240
15N
1
AG,KC01776,25CONV5 –19–19NOV99–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15N-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=321
Transport Lift Schematic

A50869 –UN–05DEC03
X101
S101 and Accessory Outlet
Plant / Transport
Black
Switch 1
2
3
Transport Trans
12 Volts
3 4
C Plant Plant 5
1
6
Red
7
Trans
F3 4 Transport Lift 1
Fuse
X132 Green
A Y4
Black Transport Lift #1
B
B A
X102 X107
5 Transport Lift 2
Transport Lift
A 6 Green
Green/Black Green/Black Green/Black
E 9 A Y5
Black
B Transport Lift #2
X103
18 Pin Connector X108
S102
Fold / Transport
Lift Switch
Fold
Trans 1
C Transport Lift W301
3
Transport Lift Frame
Control W302
Console Frame Harness
Extension
Harness
DB Transport Lift Schematic A50869

Dec 4, 2003 - 16:20 / APG
KC01776,00014EB –19–20DEC02–1/1
TM2091 (26JAN06) 240-15N-2 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=322
Group 20
Connector Locations
Connector Locations
X101 - 7 Pin Trailer Lighting and Accessory Outlet

Connector
Pin Number Circuit Code
–UN–22APR99
1 Black
2 Open
3 Yellow
4 Open
H53931
5 Brown
6 Green
7 Red
–UN–26APR99
H54484
Continued on next page TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–1/51
240
20
1

012606
PN=323
Connector Locations
X102 - Console Extension Harness/Frame Control

Console Connector

A Red
B Open
–UN–02MAY02
C Red/Black
D Brown
E Green/Black
A49201
F White/Red
G Blue
H Green/White
J Black
K White/Black A B C D E F G H
L Red/White J K L M N P R S
M Gray
N White
–UN–03APR01
P Orange J K L M N P R S
R Yellow
A B C D E F G H
S Green
H66862
A—Control Console
B—16-Pin Connector
240
20
2

012606
PN=324
Connector Locations
X103 - Console Extension Harness/Frame Harness

Connector

1 Open
2 Open
3 White/Red
4 Blue - Blue
5 Green/White - Orange
–UN–22AUG02
6 Red - Red
7 Open
8 Red/White - Red/White
A49946
9 Green/Black - Green/Black
10 Brown - White/Black
11 Black - Black
12 Gray - Gray
13 Red/Black
7 7
8 6 6 8
14 White - White
9 18 18 9
15 Green - Red/Black 1 1
10 17 17 10
16 Orange - Green/White 2 5 5 2
–UN–07MAY02
11 16 16 11
17 Yellow - White/Red 3 4 4 3
12 15 15 12
18 White/Black - Blue/White 13 14 14 13
A49203
240
20
3

012606
PN=325
Connector Locations
X104 - 1-Left Marker Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
A51889
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–4/51
X105 - 2-Right Marker Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
240
20 A51890
4
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=326
Connector Locations
X106 - 3-Auxiliary Power Connector

A Red
B Black
–UN–18JUN03
A52347
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
240
20
5

012606
PN=327
Connector Locations
X107 - 4-Transport Lift Valve 1 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
A51883
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–7/51
X108 - 5-Transport Lift Valve 2 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
240
20 A51884
6
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=328
Connector Locations
X109 - 6-Fold 1 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–18MAR03
A51885
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–9/51
X110 - 6-Fold 2 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
240
20
A51886
7
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=329
Connector Locations
X111 - 8-Right Clutch Extension Harness Connector
–19–08MAR01
H65592
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–11/51

A Green
B Black
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–12/51
X112 - 9-Left Clutch Extension Harness Connector
–19–08MAR01
240
20
H65592
8
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–13/51

A Green
B Black
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=330
Connector Locations
X113 - 10-Tongue Lift 1 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–18MAR03
A51887
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–15/51
X114 - 11-Tongue Lift 2 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
240
20
A51888
9
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=331
Connector Locations
X115 - 12-Tongue Latch 1 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
A51881
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–17/51
X116 - 13-Tongue Latch 2 Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–03MAR03
240
20
A51882
10
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=332
Connector Locations
X117 - 14-Field Solenoid Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–17MAR03
A51880
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
240
20
11

012606
PN=333
Connector Locations
X118 - Lighting Harness Connector

A Green / Brown
B Red / Green
C Black / Black
D White / Yellow
–UN–18JUN03
A52348
–UN–01FEB96
N48930
240
20
12

012606
PN=334
Connector Locations
X119 - Auto Marker Switch Extension Harness

Connector

A Red
B Green
C Black
–UN–18JUN03
A52349
–UN–27APR99
H54478
240
20
13

012606
PN=335
Connector Locations
X120 - Auto Marker Switch (Dimmer) Connector

A Red
B Green
C Black
–UN–17MAR03
A52051
–UN–13JUN00
N53868
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–22/51
X121 - Right Clutch 1 Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–17MAR03
240
20 A52052
14
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=336
Connector Locations
X122 - Right Clutch 2 (Optional) Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–17MAR03
A52052
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–24/51
X123 - Left Clutch 1 Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–17MAR03
240
20
A52052
15
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=337
Connector Locations
X124 - Left Clutch 2 (Optional) Connector

A Green
B Black
–UN–17MAR03
A52052
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
240
20
16

012606
PN=338
Connector Locations
X125 - Enhanced Lighting Module Connector

A Black
B Yellow/Black
C Yellow
D Green
E Green/Black
–UN–20MAR03
A52060
–UN–26APR99
H54485
240
20
17

012606
PN=339
Connector Locations
X126 - Right Amber Hazard Lamp Connector

B Green
–UN–18MAR03
A52056
–UN–25JUN02
H72649
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–28/51
X127 - Right Amber Hazard Lamp Connector

A Black
–UN–18MAR03
240
20 A52055
18
–UN–25JUN02
H72649

012606
PN=340
Connector Locations
X128 - Right Red Tail Lamp Connector

A Yellow
B Brown
C Black
–UN–18MAR03
D Green/Black
A52057
–UN–14SEP00
P9525
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–30/51
X129 - Left Red Tail Lamp Connector

A Yellow
B Brown
C Black
–UN–18MAR03
D Yellow/Black
240
20
A52057
19
–UN–14SEP00
P9525

012606
PN=341
Connector Locations
X130 - Left Amber Hazard Lamp Connector

B Yellow
–UN–18MAR03
A52056
–UN–25JUN02
H72649
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–32/51
X131 - Left Amber Hazard Lamp Connector

A Black
–UN–18MAR03
240
20 A52055
20
–UN–25JUN02
H72649

012606
PN=342
Connector Locations
X132 - Frame Control Power Fuse (10 Amp)

A 12A
–UN–12NOV02
A50930
A
–UN–13NOV02
A50853
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–34/51
X133 - CCS Connector

A
B
C
–UN–
240
20
H65592
21
–UN–27APR99
H54478

012606
PN=343
Connector Locations
X134 - Left Bin Level Sensor

1
2
3
–UN–27AUG03
A52602
–UN–27APR99
H54478
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–36/51
X135 - CCS Push Button Shut Off Switch (Row Unit

1
2
3
–UN–27AUG03
240
20 A52604
22
–UN–27APR99
H54478

012606
PN=344
Connector Locations
X136 - Agitation Motor Fuse

A
B
–UN–27AUG03
A52616
–UN–12JUL96
H47706
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–38/51
X137 - Agitation Motor Power

B
–UN–27AUG03
240
20
A52610
23
A B C D
–UN–03APR01
A B C D
H66865

012606
PN=345
Connector Locations
X138 - Agitation Motor Ground

*
–UN–27AUG03
A52615
–UN–07MAY97
H48616
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–40/51
X139 - CCS Agitator Motor Relay

30
85
86
–UN–27AUG03
87
87a
240
20 A52608
24
–UN–27APR99
H54480

012606
PN=346
Connector Locations
X140 - CCS System Ground

*
–UN–27AUG03
A52615
–UN–07MAY97
H48616
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–42/51
X141 - CCS Cleanout Switch (Manual)

A
B
–UN–27AUG03
240
20
A52609
25
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=347
Connector Locations
X142 - Y3 CCS Seed Delivery Fan Hydraulic Motor

Solenoid

A
B
–UN–27AUG03
A52605
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–44/51
X143 - Clean Out Mode Relay

30
85
86
–UN–27AUG03
87
87a
240
20 A52612
26
–UN–24MAR99
H54419

012606
PN=348
Connector Locations
X144 - CCS Fan Motor Relay Shut Off Relay

30
85
86
–UN–27AUG03
87
87a
A52618
–UN–24MAR99
H54419
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–46/51
X145 - Right Bin Level Sensor

1
2
3
–UN–27AUG03
240
20
A52603
27
A B C D
–UN–03APR01
A B C D
H66865

012606
PN=349
Connector Locations
X146 - Aux Lights (Tank Fill Lights)

A
B
–UN–27AUG03
A52583
–UN–27APR99
H54478
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–48/51
X347 - CCS Tank Fill Lamp #1

A Red
B Black
–UN–13NOV02
240
20 A50912
28
–UN–25APR95
RW45627

012606
PN=350
Connector Locations
X348 - CCS Tank Fill Lamp #2

A Red
B Black
–UN–13NOV02
A50913
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–50/51
X349 - CCS Tank Fill Light Switch

A Red
B Red
–UN–13NOV02
240
20
A50914
29
–UN–25APR95
RW45627
TM43761,0000070 –19–20DEC02–51/51

012606
PN=351
Connector Locations
240
20
30

012606
PN=352
Section 270
Hydraulic Diagnosis and Test
Contents
Page Page
Group 05—General Information Group 20—Hydraulic Components

How To Use This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-1 Hydraulic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-20-1
Group 15A—CCS Seed Delivery Fan Motor

Diagnostics
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15A-1
CCS Fan Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . 270-15A-2
Group 15B—Field Raise - Lower Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15B-1
Field Raise Lower Hydraulic Schematic . . . 270-15B-2
Group 15C—Fold-Unfold Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15C-1
Fold Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15C-2
Group 15D—Left Marker Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15D-1
Left Marker Hydraulic Schematic. . . . . . . . . 270-15D-2
Group 15E—Right Marker Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15E-1
Right Marker Hydraulic Schematic. . . . . . . . 270-15E-2
Group 15F—Tongue Latch Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-15F-1
Tongue Latch Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . .270-15F-2
Group 15G—Tongue Lift Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15G-1
Tongue Lift Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . . 270-15G-2
Group 15H—Tongue Lift (Independent) Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15H-1 270
Tongue Lift (Independent) Hydraulic
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15H-2
Group 15I—Transport Lift Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15I-1
Transport Lift Hydraulic Schematic . . . . . . . . 270-15I-2
Group 15J—Wing Wheel Transport Diagnostics

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15J-1
Wing Wheel Transport Hydraulic
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15J-2

012606
PN=1
Contents
270

012606
PN=2
Group 05
General Information
How To Use This Section
IMPORTANT: Troubleshoot the machine one problem

at a time. Repairing one system’s
problem may solve problems in other
systems.
Group 05 contains general information, component

identification, specifications and operational checkout
procedure.
Group 15 contains the theory of operation as well as the

diagnostic procedures for the individual
hydraulic/hydrostatic circuits.
• SCHEMATIC
A system schematic is furnished to be used along with
the diagnostic procedure to enable the user to better
understand the workings of the system.
KC01776,00014EC –19–20DEC02–1/8
Hydraulic Cautions
AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS
–UN–23AUG88
X9811
Continued on next page KC01776,00014EC –19–20DEC02–2/8
270
05
1

012606
PN=355
General Information
CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can

penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
all lines before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard.

Protect hands and body from high pressure
fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately.

Any fluid injected into the skin must be
surgically removed within a few hours or
gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with
this type of injury should reference a
knowledgeable medical source. Such
information is available from Deere & Company
Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A..
Testing Precautions
IMPORTANT: TESTING PRECAUTIONS—Serious

damage can result to the component or
to the entire hydraulic system if lines or
hoses are not connected properly.
When disconnecting a line or hose from
a hydraulic component, always mark
the line or hose and the port from
which it was removed so it can be
reconnected to the proper port.
Use two wrenches when attaching a

hose or line to a fitting to avoid
excessive twisting. Check the entire
length of the lines and hoses to be
certain they are not rubbing on moving
parts or vibrating because of loose
clamps.
CLEANLINESS—If the hydraulic system

should be disconnected for service,
protect the ends of the hoses, tubing
270
05 and ports of components from
2 contamination with clean, lint-free
towels or clean plastic bags.
Before installing any replacement hose,

flush the inside with unused diesel fuel
or unused petroleum cleaning solvent
for 10 seconds minimum. Do not use
water, water soluble cleaners or
compressed air.

012606
PN=356
General Information
270
05
3
–19–07MAR97
E42204
Hydraulic Symbols

012606
PN=357
General Information
270
05
4
–19–19NOV92
M81440AE

012606
PN=358
General Information
Component Names
Each component has a unique name and identifier to

aid in identifying these parts in the diagnostic process.
The following is a table with all of the component

names and identifiers as used in the hydraulic
sections.
The identifier begins with a letter that describes the

device:
A Accumulator
C Cylinder
D Check Valve
F Filter
G Assembly
H Oil Cooler
M Motor
O Orifices
P Pump
R Reservoir
V Valve
270
05
5

012606
PN=359
General Information
Glossary
ID Diagnostic Name Abbrev. Common/Marketing Reference
C1 Left Wing Wheel Cylinder

C2 Left Center Wheel Cylinder
C3 Right Center Wheel Cylinder
C4 Right Wing Wheel Cylinder
C5 Right Fold Cylinder
C6 Left Fold Cylinder
C7 Tongue Lift Cylinder
C8 Left Marker Cylinder
C9 Right Marker Cylinder
C10 Tongue Latch Cylinder
C11 Right Transport Lift Cylinder
C12 Left Transport Cylinder
G1 Main Hydraulic Valve Block

G2 Field / Wing Wheel Transport Valve Block
V1 Left Marker Solenoid

V2 Right Marker Solenoid
V4 Transport Lift Solenoid #1
V5 Transport Lift Solenoid #2
V6 Fold Solenoid #1
V7 Fold Solenoid #2
V10 Tongue Lift Solenoid #1
V11 Tongue Lift Solenoid #2
V12 Tongue Latch Solenoid #1
V13 Tongue Latch Solenoid #2
V14 Field/Plant Solenoid
V17 Right Relief Valve for Wing Wheel Transport.
V18 Left Relief Valve for Wing Wheel Transport.
Preliminary Checks No special tools are required to make these

preliminary checks. Repair obvious failures before
Use the following steps for locating malfunctions in the making further tests.
fan hydraulics system. Many hydraulic system failures
270 can be located by making preliminary checks of the
05 system operation.
6

012606
PN=360
General Information
1. Become acquainted with the hydraulic system and 8. Check machine maintenance records to determine
its components. Read the latest SERVICE if the recommended service procedures have been
INFORMATION BULLETINS. performed and at the correct intervals. Note
previous reports of unusual, frequent, or similar
2. If possible, talk with the operator about how the failures
machine was performing when it failed.
9. If possible, operate machine. Activate all hydraulic
3. With engine stopped, check for evidence of external functions and be alert for conditions that could
oil leakage around oil seals, gaskets, or hydraulic isolate the problem. Also be alert for conditions that
line connections. Check for pinched or kinked lines could cause further damage. Be prepared to stop
and hoses that could restrict oil flow and cause oil the engine immediately.
to heat.
CAUTION: Keep hands away from moving
4. Check for broken drives, broken or binding
parts. Stop engine before checking hydraulic
linkages, or other mechanical failures.
or hydrostatic lines near moving parts.
5. Check hydraulic oil level and determine type of oil
10. With engine operating, check for external and
used.
internal leaks. With all hydraulic functions in
neutral, check function component return lines and
6. Check hydraulic oil for milky, dirty, or discolored
housings for heating. If component control valves
conditions. Smell the oil. A distinctive burned odor
are leaking, return lines will be hot.
indicates presence of excessive heat that can
destroy the oil’s lubricating qualities. Determine the
11. If these preliminary checks have failed to isolate
conditions cause, correct it, and change the oil.
the hydraulic problem, list all possible causes for
the failure, then proceed to "DIAGNOSE
7. Check for a plugged or damaged hydraulic oil filter.
MALFUNCTIONS" in the applicable group.
A failed filter permits contaminants to circulate in
the system, affecting system operation and tests. If
filter is plugged, an examination of the contaminant
may indicate what caused the failure.
KC01776,00014EC –19–20DEC02–8/8
270
05
7

012606
PN=361
General Information
270
05
8

012606
PN=362
Group 15A
CCS Seed Delivery Fan Motor Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
Plant Mode With the CCS Seed Delivery System, a the Tractor’s SCV associated with the Field
hydraulically driven fan provides airflow for seed Raise/Lower Circuit to the Planter Lower Detent. This
delivery from a central tank to a hopper on the row supplies Continuous Hydraulic Flow to the Fan without
unit. The metering of the seed is still handled by a lowering the planter.
meter at the row unit to maintain consistent and
accurate seed spacing. CCS Seed Delivery acts as a With the Key Switch in the RUN position, 12 VDC
tender for the row unit; It provides a small pool of seed supplied by the tractor energizes the CCS Seed
at each row unit at all times to supply the need of the Delivery Fan Hydraulic Motor Solenoid (S3), energizing
meter. In order for the CCS Seed Delivery Fan to turn, the solenoid. If the Tractor’s SCV associated with the
the PLANT-CLEAN OUT mode on the CCS Clean Out Field Raise/Lower Circuit is in the Planter Lower
Switch located near the Vacuum Gauge on the planter Detent and supplying continuous hydraulic flow, the
must be selected, and the planter must be completely fan is able to turn. Pressurized oil from the Tractor
unfolded and lowered to the ground. Also, the Tractor’s SCV (V2A) is allowed to flow through Flow Control
SCV associated with the Field Raise/Lower circuit Valve (V22) and into the CCS Seed Delivery Fan
must be in the Planter Lower Detent and supplying Motor Case. Here, pressurized oil passes through CCS
Continuous Hydraulic Flow. Hydraulic Fan Motor Solenoid Valve (S14) and Fixed
Orifice (05) before entering the CCS Fixed
Purge Hoses Mode For Clean Out purposes, the CCS Displacement Hydraulic Fan Motor (M2). After the oil
Seed Delivery Fan can be turned on while the Planter exits the CCS Seed Delivery Fan Motor Case, it flows
is fully raised. This is done by selecting the PURGE through the CCS Hydraulic Oil Cooler (H1) and a One
HOSES mode on the CCS Clean Out Switch located Way Check Valve (D14) before re-entering the tractor
near the Vacuum Gauge on the planter and positioning on (V1A).
AG,KC01776,25CONV6 –19–19NOV99–1/1
270
15A
1

012606
PN=363
CCS Seed Delivery Fan Motor Diagnostics
CCS Fan Hydraulic Schematic
C.C.S Seed
Delivery Fan
Motor Case
V3
C.C.S. Hydraulic Fan
Motor Solenoid Valve
M2
C.C.S. Fixed
Displacement
05 Hydraulic Fan Motor
Fixed Orifice
H1
CCS Hydraulic
Oil Cooler
V22
Flow Control
Valve
D14
One Way Check
Valve Kit
G1
Hydraulic
V1A Valve Block
Tractor SCV
Coupler
Field Raise/ Lower,
Transport Raise/Lower,
Marker Raise/Lower
and Fold/Unfold
270 Hydraulic Circuits
15A
2
V2A
Tractor SCV
Coupler
–UN–15JAN04
V3A
Tractor Case Drain Motor Coupler C.C.S. Seed Delivery Fan Motor Hydraulic Schematic
A53330
Jan 15, 2004 - 11:29 / TDM A53330
HX05709,0004BFD –19–14NOV03–1/1

012606
PN=364
Group 15B
Field Raise - Lower Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid of the Left Wing Wheel Field Raise Lower Cylinder
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a (C1) returns back to the Tractor SCV #1 (V2).
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized.
The functions are selected with the corresponding When the Center Field Raise/Lower cylinders pistons
switches and controlled with the tractor selective get to the top of their stroke a rephaseing port opens
control valves. up in the cylinder allowing oil to bypass the piston to
allow the cylinders to rephase. Likewise when the
For the planter to raise and lower it is necessary for Wing Field Raise/Lower cylinders pistons get to the
the Field Solenoid Valve (S1) be energized with end of their stroke they also open up a rephaseing port
electrical power to allow it to open to allow oil to flow allowing the cylinders to rephase. Rephaseing is
both to and from the planter raise/lower hydraulic important to keep the machine level in raising and
cylinders. See Field Raise/Lower Electrical Theory for lowering the complete planter. Rephaseing is
details. It should also be noted that because of the accomplished by having the operator hold the SCV in
check valve located in the Field Solenoid Valve (S1) the raise position for a few seconds every time he
the planter will raise but not lower if the valve is not raises the planter.
energized
Planter Lower:
Planter Raise: As the planter is raised, pressurized oil from the
As the planter is raised, pressurized oil from the Tractor SCV #1 (V2) is allowed to flow into rod end of
Tractor SCV #1 (V1) is allowed to flow into Field and the Right Wing Wheel Cylinder. Oil from the piston
Wing Wheel Transport Valve Block (G2). With the side of this cylinder then flows through the Right Relief
Field Solenoid Valve electrically energized oil flows Valve area of the Wing Wheel Transport Valve Block
through this valve block and on to the base end of (G2) and on to the rod end of the Right Center Field
both the Right (C2) and Left (C3) Center Field Raise/Lower cylinder. The return oil out of the piston
Raise/Lower Cylinders. These cylinder rods are tied end of the Right Center Field Raise/Lower cylinder
together with a mechanical rockshaft so they move then returns through the energized Field Solenoid
together. As the Right cylinder moves, oil coming out Valve (S1) and back to the Tractor SCV #1 (V1). At
of the rod end of the Right cylinder goes back through the same time oil from the SCV #1 (V2) is allowed to
the Field and Wing Wheel Transport Valve Block (G2) flow into rod end of the Left Wing Wheel Cylinder. Oil
(Right Relief Valve Area) and to the base end of the from the piston side of this cylinder then flows through
Right Wing Wheel Field Raise Lower Cylinder (C4). Oil the Left Relief Valve area of the Wing Wheel Transport
out of the rod end of the Right Wing Wheel Field Raise Valve Block (G2) and on to the rod end of the Left
Lower Cylinder (C4) returns back to the Tractor SCV Center Field Raise/Lower cylinder. The return oil out of
#1 (V2). At the same time the Left as the Left center the piston end of the Left Center Field Raise/Lower
cylinder moves, oil coming out of the rod end of the cylinder then returns through the energized Field
Left cylinder goes back through the Field and Wing Solenoid Valve (S1) and back to the Tractor SCV #1
Wheel Transport Valve Block (G2) (Left Relief Valve (V1). Since the cylinder rods of the center cylinders
Area) and to the base end of the Left Wing Wheel are tied together with a mechanical rockshaft they
Field Raise Lower Cylinder (C1). Oil out of the rod end move together allowing the planter to lower Level.
270
15B
1
HX05709,0001D04CONV5 –19–22AUG01–1/1

012606
PN=365
Field Raise - Lower Diagnostics
Field Raise Lower Hydraulic Schematic

A50887 –UN–15OCT03
C1 C4
C2 C3 Wing Wheels
Wing Wheels
Left Center Right Center Right Field
Left Field Raise
Field Raise Field Raise Raise Lower
Lower
Lower Lower
Rephasing Port Rephasing Ports Rephasing Port
Rockshaft
V2
Tractor SCV
#1 Coupler
V14
Field/Plant
Solenoid
V1 Valve
Tractor SCV
#1 Coupler
V18 V17
Field Raise-Lower Hydraulic Schematic
Left Relief Right Relief Oct 15, 2003 - 08:44 / APG A50887
Valve Valve
(Adjustable) (Adjustable)
G2
Field and Wing Wheel Transport
Valve Block
KC01776,00014F2 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=366
Group 15C
Fold-Unfold Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid though the #2 Fold Solenoid Valve (S7) which is
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a electrical energized. Oil from the valve goes into the
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. piston end of the Left and Right Fold Cylinders C5 and
The functions are selected with the corresponding C6 pushing the cylinder rod out causing the planter to
switches and controlled with the tractor selective fold. The oil out of the rod end of both the Left and
control valve(s). Right Fold Cylinders flows to the Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block (G1) through the energized #1 Fold
For ease of transportation, the planter’s wings fold Solenoid Valve (S6) and back to the Tractor SCV #2
forward to the transport position and the machine is (V1).
towed like a two-wheeled cart behind the tractor. The
machine is folded by pressing the PLANT-TRANS Unfolding the Planter: Oil from the Tractor SCV #2
(S101) mode switch to the TRANS position, holding (V1) flows through the energized #1 Fold Solenoid
the FOLD-TRANSPORT LIFT (S102) mode switch to Valve (S6) located in the Electro Hydraulic Valve Block
the FOLD mode detent, and activating the #2 SCV (G1). Oil then passes on to the rod end of the Left and
until the machine is folded. Once folded, the Planter Right Fold Cylinders C5 and C6 pushing the cylinder
Hitch can be raised and the Tongue Latch can be rod in causing the planter to unfold. Return oil from the
Latched and the Wing Wheels can then be retracted to piston end of the cylinder returns to the Electro
ready the planter to be transported. The rear of the Hydraulic Valve Block (G1) through the energized #2
planter can then be raised for additional transport Fold Solenoid Valve (S7) and on back to the Tractor
clearance. SCV #2 (V2).
Folding the Planter: Oil from the Tractor #2 SCV (V2)

flows to the Electro Hydraulic Valve Block (G1) and
HX05709,0001D04CONV6 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15C
1

012606
PN=367
Fold-Unfold Diagnostics
Fold Hydraulic Schematic
V6
Fold
Solenoid Valve #1
G1 Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block G1
Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block
V6
V7 Fold
Fold Solenoid Valve #1
Solenoid Valve #2
C6 C5
V1 Left Fold Right Fold
Tractor SCV Cylinder Cylinder
#2 Coupler
V7
Fold
Solenoid Valve #2
V2
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
270
15C
2
–UN–15OCT03
DB Fold Hydraulic Schematic

Oct 15, 2003 - 08:46 / APG A50888
A50888
KC01776,00014F3 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=368
Group 15D
Left Marker Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid and a Manual Marker Mode controlled by the Frame
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a Control Console which activates a Hydraulic Solenoid
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. (V1) on the Electro Hydraulic Valve Block (G2). When
The functions are selected with the corresponding the SCV #2 (V1) is moved oil flows through the
switches and controlled with the tractor selective energized Left Marker Solenoid Valve (V1) to the
control valve(s). piston end of the Left Marker Cylinder (C8) extending
the cylinder causing the marker to lower. Return oil out
This machine is equipped with a left and right hand of the rod end of the cylinder returns through the valve
marker system. Mounted to the end of each marker block to the tractor SCV #2 (V2). To raise the marker
arm is a marker disk. As the planter is pulled through the operator would move the SCV in the opposite
the field with one of the two markers in the unfolded direction causing oil to flow to the rod end of the Left
position, the marker disk creates a small furrow in the Marker Cylinder (C8). Return oil from the piston end of
soil. As the operator turns the machine around on the the cylinder would then return through the valve block
headland and lines up for the next pass through the and energized Left Marker Solenoid (V1) and back to
field, the furrow created by the marker disk is used as the tractor SCV #2 (V1).
a guideline for the operator to follow.
Left Marker Raise/Lower

The Planter Marker System has a Auto Marker Mode
HX05709,0001D04CONV7 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15D
1

012606
PN=369
Left Marker Diagnostics
Left Marker Hydraulic Schematic
V1
Left Marker
Solenoid Valve
Valve Block G2
Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block
V1
Left Marker
Solenoid Valve
V1
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
C8
Left Marker
Cylinder
V2
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
270
15D
2
–UN–15OCT03
DB Left Marker Hydraulic Schematic

A50890
Oct 15, 2003 - 08:48 / APG A50890
KC01776,00014F4 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=370
Group 15E
Right Marker Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid and a Manual Marker Mode controlled by the Frame
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a Control Console which activates a Hydraulic Solenoid
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. (V2) on the Electro Hydraulic Valve Block (G2). When
The functions are selected with the corresponding the SCV #2 (V1) is moved oil flows through the
switches and controlled with the tractor selective energized Right Marker Solenoid Valve (V2) to the
control valve(s). piston end of the Right Marker Cylinder (C9) extending
the cylinder causing the marker to lower. Return oil out
This machine is equipped with a left and right hand of the rod end of the cylinder returns through the valve
marker system. Mounted to the end of each marker block to the tractor SCV #2 (V2). To raise the marker
arm is a marker disk. As the planter is pulled through the operator would move the SCV in the opposite
the field with one of the two markers in the unfolded direction causing oil to flow to the rod end of the Right
position, the marker disk creates a small furrow in the Marker Cylinder (C9). Return oil from the piston end of
soil. As the operator turns the machine around on the the cylinder would then return through the valve block
headland and lines up for the next pass through the and energized Right Marker Solenoid (V2) and back to
field, the furrow created by the marker disk is used as the tractor SCV #2 (V1).
a guideline for the operator to follow.
Right Marker Raise/Lower

The Planter Marker System has a Auto Marker Mode
HX05709,0001D04CONV8 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15E
1

012606
PN=371
Right Marker Diagnostics
Right Marker Hydraulic Schematic
V2
Right Marker
Solenoid Valve
Valve Block G1
Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block
V2
Right Marker
Solenoid Valve
V1
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
C9
Right Marker
Cylinder
V2
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
270
15E
2
–UN–15OCT03
DB Right Marker Hydraulic Schematic

Oct 15, 2003 - 08:52 / APG A50891
A50891
KC01776,00014F5 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=372
Group 15F
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid Solenoid #2 (V13) on the Electro Hydraulic Valve
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a Block (G2). When the SCV #2 (V1) is moved, oil flows
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. through the energized Tongue Latch Solenoid Valve
The functions are selected with the corresponding #1 (V12) to the rod end of the Tongue Latch Cylinder
switches and controlled with the tractor selective (C10) retracting the cylinder causing the latch to
control valve(s). secure the wings of the planter to tongue of the
planter. Return oil out of the Piston end of the cylinder
The Tongue Latch allows the wings of the planter to returns through the energized Tongue Latch Solenoid
be latched to the tongue of the planter when it is Valve #2 (V13) to the tractor SCV #2 (V2). To unlatch
folded. This allows the planter wing frames to be the tongue the operator would move the SCV in the
secured to the planter tongue when the machine is opposite direction causing oil to flow to the piston end
transported. of the Tongue Latch Cylinder (C10). Return oil from
the rod end of the cylinder would then return through
The Planter Tongue Latch System is controlled by the the valve block and the energized Tongue Latch
Frame Control Console which activates a Hydraulic Solenoid Valve #2 (V13) and back to the tractor SCV
Tongue Latch Solenoid #1 (V12) and Tongue Latch #2 (V1).
HX05709,0001D04CONV9 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15F
1

012606
PN=373
Tongue Latch Hydraulic Schematic
V12
Tongue Latch #1
Solenoid Valve
Valve Block
G1
Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block
V12
V13 Tongue Latch #1
Tongue Latch #2 Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
V1
C10
Tractor SCV
Tongue Latch
#2 Coupler
Cylinder
V13
Tongue Latch #2
Solenoid Valve
V2
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
270
15F
2
–UN–15OCT03
DB Tongue Latch Hydraulic Schematic

Oct 15, 2003 - 08:56 / APG A50892
A50892
KC01776,00014F6 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=374
Group 15G
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid Tongue Lift Solenoid #1 (V10) and Tongue Lift
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a Solenoid #2 (V11) on the Electro Hydraulic Valve
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. Block (G2). When the SCV #2 (V1) is moved, oil flows
The functions are selected with the corresponding through the energized Tongue Lift Solenoid Valve #1
switches and controlled with the tractor selective (V10) to the piston end of the Tongue Lift Cylinder
control valve(s). (C7) extending the cylinder causing the Tongue to
raise. Return oil out of the rod end of the cylinder
The Tongue Lift allows the Tongue of the planter to be returns through the energized Tongue Lift Solenoid
raised and lowered to allow the planter tongue to come Valve #2 (V11) to the tractor SCV #2 (V2). To lower
in contact with the wing frames so that planter can be the tongue the operator would move the SCV in the
Latched for transport. Planters have the option to have opposite direction causing oil to flow to the rod end of
this hydraulic function of the Tongue Lift to be on a the Tongue Lift Cylinder (C7). Return oil from the rod
separate independent SCV or to use the same #2 end of the cylinder would then return through the valve
SCV, which is used for other functions on the planter, block and the energized Tongue Lift Solenoid Valve #2
for Tongue Lift. (V11) and back to the tractor SCV #2 (V1).
The Planter Tongue Lift System is controlled by the

Frame Control Console which activates a Hydraulic
HX05709,0001D04CONV10 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15G
1

012606
PN=375
Tongue Lift Hydraulic Schematic
V10
Tongue Lift #1
Solenoid Valve
Valve Block
G1
Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block
V10
Tongue Lift #1
V11 Solenoid Valve
Tongue Lift #2
Solenoid Valve
V1
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler C7
Tongue Lift
Cylinder
V11
Tongue Lift #2
Solenoid Valve
V2
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
270
15G
2
–UN–15OCT03
DB Tongue Lift Hydraulic Schematic

Oct 15, 2003 - 09:50 / APG A50893
A50893
KC01776,00014F7 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=376
Group 15H
Tongue Lift (Independent) Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Machine can be set up for Independent Tongue raise the tongue of the planter simply by moving the
Lift or Solenoid activated Tongue Lift. When using the SCV in one direction and lowering it by moving the
Independent Tongue Lift the tractor will need to have SCV in the other direction.
enough SCV’s to dedicate one of them for the Tongue
Raise/Lower (Lift) functions. If there is not enough The Independent Tongue Lift is a simple hydraulic
SCV’s on the tractor the owner has the option to circuit where the hoses from the cylinder are attached
purchase a Solenoid Activated Tongue Lift. Tongue Lift directly to the tractor SCV. The planter has a Tongue
is used to raise and lower the tongue to allow the Lift (C7) Cylinder attached to the Tongue of the Planter
machine to be folded and latched for transport and to and as the SCV is activated one way the Tongue will
be unlatched and unfolded for field use. Raise and when the SCV activated the other way will
cause the Tongue to Lower.
The operator would operate a SCV that was directly
hooked to the Tongue Lift Cylinder. This allows him to
HX05709,0001D04CONV11 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15H
1

012606
PN=377
Tongue Lift (Independent) Diagnostics
Tongue Lift (Independent) Hydraulic Schematic
V1
Tractor SCV
#3 Coupler
C7
Tongue Lift
Cylinder
V2
Tractor SCV
#3 Coupler
–UN–15OCT03
Independent Tongue Lift Hydraulic Schematic
A50889
Oct 3, 2003 - 13:13 / APG A50889
KC01776,00014F8 –19–20DEC02–1/1
270
15H
2

012606
PN=378
Group 15I
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid The Planter Transport Lift System is controlled by the
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a Frame Control Console which activates a Hydraulic
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. Transport Lift Solenoid #1 (V4) and Transport Lift
The functions are selected with the corresponding Solenoid #2 (V5) on the Electro Hydraulic Valve Block
switches and controlled with the tractor selective (G2). When the SCV #2 (V1) is moved, oil flows
control valve(s). through the energized Transport Lift Solenoid Valve #1
(V4) to the piston end of the Transport Lift Cylinders
The Transport Lift Cylinders are actually made (C11 and C12) extending the cylinder causing the
together with the Planter Raise/Lower Cylinders. Even Machine to Raise into a high transport position. Return
though they share a common cylinder barrel they oil out of the rod end of the cylinders returns through
operate as two entirely different cylinders. They both the energized Transport Lift Solenoid Valve #2 (V5) to
have separate cylinder rods and pistons and operate the tractor SCV #2 (V2). To lower the planter out of
separately. The Planter Raise/Lower cylinder pushes high transport the operator would move the SCV in the
down to raise the planter in the field and the Transport opposite direction causing oil to flow to the rod end of
Lift cylinders pushes up to allow the planter frame to the Transport Lift Cylinder (C11 and C12). Return oil
be raised higher for Transport. The Transport Lift from the rod end of the cylinder would then return
switch and Solenoids direct the oil to allow the rear of through the valve block and the energized Transport
the planter to be raised when the planter is in the Lift Solenoid Valve #2 (V5) and back to the tractor
Transport position providing additional road clearance SCV #2 (V1).
when transporting.
HX05709,0001D04CONV12 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15I
1

012606
PN=379
Transport Lift Hydraulic Schematic
V4
Transport Lift
#1
Solenoid Valve
Valve Block
G1
Electro Hydraulic
Valve Block
V4
Transport Lift
#1 Solenoid
V5 Valve
Transport Lift #2
V1 Solenoid Valve C12 C11
Tractor SCV Left Right
#2 Coupler Transport Lift Transport Lift
Cylinder Cylinder
V5
Transport Lift #2
Solenoid Valve
V2
Tractor SCV
#2 Coupler
270
15I
2
–UN–15OCT03
DB Transport Lift Hydraulic Schematic

A51049
A51049
Oct 15, 2003 - 09:51 / APG
KC01776,00014F9 –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=380
Group 15J
Wing Wheel Transport Diagnostics
Theory of Operation
The Frame Control Console Switches operate solenoid system builds until check balls of the Left Relief Valve
hydraulic valves. These solenoid valves prevent a (V18) and Right Relief Valve (V17) move off their seat
cylinder from operating unless valves are energized. allowing the oil from the piston end of the left and right
The functions are selected with the corresponding Wing Wheel Cylinders (C1 and C4) to pass back the
switches and controlled with the tractor selective Tractor SCV #1 (V1A) allowing the Wing Wheels to
control valve(s). retract. Both Relief Valves V17 and V18 are adjustable
relief valves
In preparing the machine for transport it is necessary
to raise the wing wheels off of the ground after the Lowering the Wing Wheels is accomplished by the
planter has been folded and latched to allow the operator having the planter Plant / Transport Switch
machine to be transported. It is also necessary to (S101) on the console set to the TRANSPORT
lower the wing wheels to the ground before unfolding position. In this position the Field/Plant Solenoid (V14)
so that the planter wings can roll away from the tongue is not energized. To operator then needs to move the
to the field position. Tractor SCV #1 (V2A) to send oil to the Field / Plant
Solenoid (V14) which is not energized but allows oil
Once the planter is folded and latched the operator flow to pass through the check valve in the Solenoid.
needs to have the planter Plant / Transport Switch Oil then flows to the piston end of the Center Wheel
(S101) on the console set to the TRANSPORT Cylinders (C2 and C3) extending them completely. Oil
position. In this position the Field/Plant Solenoid (V14) from the rod end of the Center cylinders goes to rod
is not energized. To operator then needs to move the end the Wing Wheel Cylinders (C1 and C4) extending
Tractor SCV #1 (V2A) to send oil to the rod end of the them as well. When the Center Wheel Cylinders are
left and right Wing Wheel Cylinders (C1 and C4). extended all the way the piston passes a rephasing
Return oil from the piston end of these Wing Wheel port which allows oil to flow past the piston and on to
Cylinders tries to go to the rod end of the Center the piston end of the Wing Wheel Cylinders until they
Wheel Cylinders (C2 and C3) however, since the Field are extended all the way. All Wheel Cylinders are in
/ Plant Solenoid (V14) is not energized the oil is phase which will allow the planter to raise and lower
checked and cannot flow through the valve causing the level after the planter is unfolded. Return oil from the
oil out of the out of the piston end of the Center Wheel Wing Wheel Cylinders flows back to the Tractor SCV
Cylinders not to move. The pressure of the oil in the #1 (V2A).
HX05709,0001D04CONV13 –19–22AUG01–1/1
270
15J
1

012606
PN=381
Wing Wheel Transport Diagnostics
Wing Wheel Transport Hydraulic Schematic

A50894 –UN–15OCT03
C1 C2 C3 C4
Wing Wheels Left Center Right Center Wing Wheels
Left Field Raise Wheel Wheel Field Right Field
Lower Field Raise Raise Lower Raise Lower
Lower
Rephasing Port Rephasing Ports Rephasing Port
Rockshaft
V2A
Tractor SCV
#1 Coupler
V14
Field/Plant
Solenoid
V1A Valve
Tractor SCV
#1 Coupler
V18 V17
Left Relief Right Relief
Valve Valve
(Adjustable) (Adjustable)
G2 Wing Wheel Transport Hydraulic Schematic

Oct 15, 2003 - 10:21 / APG A50894
Field and Wing Wheel
Transport
Valve Block
KC01776,00014FA –19–20DEC02–1/1

012606
PN=382
Group 20
Hydraulic Components
C1 - Left Wing Wheel Lift Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51868
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–1/27
C2 - Left Center Wheel Lift Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51869
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–2/27
C3 - Right Center Wheel Lift Cylinder
270
20
1
–UN–03MAR03
A51870
Continued on next page OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–3/27

012606
PN=383
C4 - Right Wing Wheel Lift Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51871
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–4/27
C5 - Right Fold Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51872
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–5/27
C6 - Left Fold Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51873
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–6/27
270 C7 - Tongue Lift Cylinder

20
2
–UN–03MAR03
A51874

012606
PN=384
C8 - Left Marker Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51875
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–8/27
C9 - Right Marker Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51876
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–9/27
C10 - Tongue Latch Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
270
20
3
A51877

012606
PN=385
C11 - Right Transport Lift Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51878
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–11/27
C12 - Left Transport Lift Cylinder
–UN–03MAR03
A51879
270
20
4

012606
PN=386
G1
ElectroHydraulic Valve Block
V12 V4 V6 V10 V1 V2
Tongue Transport Fold Tongue Left Right
Latch Lift Lift Marker Marker

Latch Lift Rod End Lift Marker Marker
Rod End Piston End Piston End Piston End Piston End

Latch Lift Piston End Lift Marker Marker
Piston End Rod End Rod End Rod End Rod End
270
20
5
–UN–16OCT03
Main Hydraulic Valve Location

V13 V5 V7 V11 Oct 15, 2003 - 08:43 / APG
A51412
Tongue Transport Fold Tongue
Latch Lift Lift
A51412
G1 Main Electro-hydraulic Valve Block

012606
PN=387
V14
Field/Plant
Solenoid Valve
Piston End of
Planter Lift
Cylinders
Rod End of Left Rod End of

Center Field Right Center
Raise Lower Field Raise
Cylinder Lower Cylinder
V18
V19
Left Relief
Right Relief
Valve
Valve
(Adjustable)
(Adjustable)
Piston End of G2 Piston End of

Left Wing Field and Wing Wheel Transport Right Wing
Cylinder Cylinder
Valve Block
270
20
6
–UN–15OCT03
Field and Wing Wheel Transport

Valve Block Location
Oct 15, 2003 - 08:42 / APG A51410
A51410
G2 Wing Wheel and Field Valve

012606
PN=388
V1 - Left Marker Solenoid Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51889
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–15/27
V2 - Right Marker Solenoid Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51890
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–16/27
V4 - Transport Lift 1 Solenoid Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51883
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–17/27
V5 - Transport Lift 2 Solenoid Valve 270

20
7
–UN–03MAR03
A51884

012606
PN=389
V6 - Fold 1 Solenoid Valve
–UN–18MAR03
A51885
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–19/27
V7 - Fold 2 Solenoid Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51886
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–20/27
V10 - Tongue Lift 1 Solenoid Valve
–UN–18MAR03
A51887
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–21/27
270 V11 - Tongue Lift 2 Solenoid Valve

20
8
–UN–03MAR03
A51888

012606
PN=390
V12 - Tongue Latch 1 Solenoid Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51881
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–23/27
V13 - Tongue Latch 2 Solenoid Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51882
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–24/27
V14 - Field / Plant Solenoid Valve
–UN–17MAR03
A51880
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–25/27
V17 - Right Relief Valve 270

20
9
–UN–03MAR03
A51891

012606
PN=391
V18 - Left Relief Valve
–UN–03MAR03
A51892
OUO6045,0000267 –19–02MAY02–27/27
270
20
10

012606
PN=392
Index
Page Page
A Adjust closing wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-4

Closing wheels
Adhesives and sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-4 Down force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-5
Adjust Stagger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-4
Planting depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-22 Connectors
Trans. wheel engagement point . . . . . . . .50-20-22 Handling and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-2
Coulter bearing
Adjust coulter bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-2
Coulter maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-2
C
CCS Auxiliary Power

D
Auxiliary Power, CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-1
CCS Low Tank Warning
Diagnostic Information
Low Tank Warning, CCS. . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15C-1
How to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-1
CCS Seed Delivery Agitator
Diagnostic Procedures
Seed Delivery Agitator, CCS . . . . . . . . . 240-15B-1
How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-1
Double disk
CCS Seed Fan
Seed opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-4, 30-20-7
Fan, CCS Seed Delivery . . . . . . . . . . 270-15A-1
Double eliminator
CCS Tank Fill Lights
Edible beans flat type seed disk . . . . . . . .30-05-15
Tank Fill Lights, CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15F-1
Sweet corn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-15
Central commodity system
Down force springs
Agitator motor
Double, light duty
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-12
Non-adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-2
Fan assembly
Light duty
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . .25-15-1, 25-15-2
Non-adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-1
Repair blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15-4, 25-15-7
Downforce springs
Fan assembly motor
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-3
Inspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-5
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-40-6
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-6
Drill shaft
Refuge plus tank
Center frame drill shaft
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-6
Seed delivery hose
Center frame drill shaft (upper)
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-10-2
Wing frame drill shaft
Seed tanks
Drillshaft couplers
Tank manifold
Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-30-6
Drive chains, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-05-1
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-28
Drive wheels
Repair, with plastic end plates . . . . . . . .25-05-30
Seed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-10-1
Replace nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-22
Drives
Tanks
Insecticide/herbicide
Seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-9
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-4
Changing planting depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-22
Closing wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-3 Indx
Center closing wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-3 E 1
Down force
Adjust down force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-5 Electrical Schematics
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-2 Auxiliary Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15A-2
Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-4 Field Raise Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15G-2
TM2091 (26JAN06) Index-1 DB Series Planters

012606
PN=1
Index
Page Page
Fold Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15J-2 Grease

Half Width Disconnect Schematic . . . . . 240-15H-2 Extreme pressure and multipurpose . . . . . .10-10-1
How to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-3
Light Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15I-3
Marker Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15K-3 H
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-5
Tongue Latch Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15L-2 Half-width disconnect
Tongue Lift Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15M-2 Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-40-1
Transport Lift Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15N-2 Herbicide, calibrate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-1
Emergency crack repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-3 Hydraulic
Emergency "T" joint repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-3 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-1
Essential or recommended tools Operation and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-1
Group name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-1 Hydraulic Locations
Polyethylene tank repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-20-1 Locations, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-20-1
Seed openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-1 Hydraulic oil cooler
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-10-1
Hydraulic Schematics
Field Raise Lower Schematic . . . . . . . . 270-15B-2
F Fold Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15C-2
Independent Tongue Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15H-2
Fan Left Marker Hydraulic Schematic. . . . . . 270-15D-2
Central commodity system Right Marker Hydraulic Schematic . . . . 270-15E-2
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . .25-15-1, 25-15-2 Tongue Latch Hydraulic Schematic . . . . .270-15F-2
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15-4, 25-15-7 Tongue Lift Hydraulic Schematic. . . . . . 270-15G-2
Feed cup Transport Lift Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15I-2
Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-11 Wing Wheel Transport Hydraulic
Low rate sorghum Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15J-2
Assembly feed cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-12 Hydraulic system
Feed-cup Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-6
Low rate sorghum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-12 Hydraulics
Field Raise/Lower Vacuum meter
Raise/Lower - Field Position . . . . . . . . . 240-15G-1 Vacuum gauge
Raise/Lower, Field Position. . . . . . . . . . 270-15B-1 Vacuum gauge adjustment. . . . . . . . . .20-05-2
Finger pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-2
Inspect finger pick-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-3
Remove and install finger pick-up . . . . . . . .30-10-5 I
Flow control valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-10
Insecticide, calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-1
Frame repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-1
Insecticide/herbicide meter
Drive alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-4
G
K
Gauge wheel Knockout assembly
Bearing replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-16 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-14
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-13
Gauge wheels
Indx Adjust gauge wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-20 L
2 Exploded view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-15
Gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-1 Lighting
General Information Turn Signals
Hydraulic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-1 Warning Lights
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-10 Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15I-1

012606
PN=2
Index
Page Page
Lighting - Optional Field Lights Plateless meter unit

Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-15F-1 Feed cup
Lubricant Install feed cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-13
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-2 Low rate sorghum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-12
Platform
Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-6
PRO-SERIES
M Adjust meter hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-9
Inspect vacuum meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-6
Machine Fold/Unfold Install vacuum meter brush . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-8
Fold/Unfold . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15C-1, 270-15H-1 Remove and install seed disk . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-6
Fold/Unfold Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15J-1 Repair pro-shaft drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-10
Marker Raise/Lower Manual Mode Row units
Manual Mode, Marker Raise/Lower. . . . 240-15K-1 Exploded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-2
Marker Raise/Lower with Frame Raise/Lower Remove vacuum meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-4
Raise/Lower, Markers Pro-Shaft Drive
Frame Raise/Lower with Marker Replace cable drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-10
Raise/Lower . . . . . . . . . 270-15D-1, 270-15E-1, Replace drillshaft drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-12
270-15F-1, 270-15G-1, 270-15I-1, Replace meter drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-11
270-15J-1
MAXEMERGE PLUS
Seed opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-4
Meter, vacuum R
Brushes
Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-8 Radial bean meter
Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-6 Assemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-17
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-15-4 Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10-14
Motor Right Clutch Engage-Disengage
Vacuum Clutch Engage-Disengage. . . . . . . . . . . 240-15H-1
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-13 Row Cleaner
Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-12 Disassemble and assemble . . . . . . . . . . . .30-25-6
Row vacuum reading, check. . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-4
O
S
Oil Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-1
Operation and Tests Scrapers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-22
Hydraulic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270-05-1 Seed openers
Other material Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-21
Coulter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-1 Replace seed openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-22
Insecticide/herbicide meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-1 Seed disk
MAXEMERGE vacuum meters . . . . . . . . . .30-05-1 Inspect seed disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-11
Seed delivery hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-10-1 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-17
Seed openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-1 Seed drive transmision
Seed tanks and manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-1 Remove and install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-3
Vacuum system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-1 Seed opener
Double disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-4, 30-20-7
Gauge wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-13 Indx
Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-8 3
P Scrapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-21, 30-20-22
Seed openers, replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-10
Planting depth Seed transmission
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-22 Disassemble and assemble . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-4

012606
PN=3
Index
Page Page
Exploded view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-2 Vacuum level

Seed tube guard, replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-10 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-3
Service Equipment and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-9 Vacuum manifold system, clean . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-9
Shear pins, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-05-1 Vacuum meter
Skip welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-4 Access vacuum meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-2 Adjust hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-11
CCS fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15-1 Adjust vacuum meter baffle. . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-10
Central commodity system . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-2 Double eliminator
Coulter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-35-1 Install double eliminator . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-15
Drillshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-30-1 Edible beans flat type seed disk
Insecticide/herbicide meter . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-30-1 Double eliminator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-15
Seed drive transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-1 Field test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-3
Seed openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-2 Inspect vacuum meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-7
Sprockets, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-05-2 Knockout assembly
Storing lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10-2 Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-14
Stress relief (normalizing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-05-4 Install knockout assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-9
Repair vacuum meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-6
Sweet corn
Double eliminator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-15
T
Vacuum level, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-3
Vacuum motor
Tank
Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-11, 70-05-1
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-05-9
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-13
Tanks
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-05-12
Lid Ring
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-05-2
Vacuum seed meter
Polyethylene Plastic
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-5
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-20-4
Variable rate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-45-1
RIVNUT threaded inserts
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-20-7
Tools, Service Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240-05-9
Torque chart
External hexagon plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-15
Face seal fittings
Metric
Standard pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-8
SAE
Standard pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-10
Four bolt flange
SAE
High pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-14
Standard pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15-13
Transmission
Engagement point, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-20-22
Seed, disassemble and assemble. . . . . . . .50-20-4
TRU-VEE
Seed opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-20-4
Indx
4
V
Vacuum
Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-05-13, 30-15-3

012606
PN=4

Technical Manual DB Series Planters Diagnosis and Repair

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual DB Series Planters Diagnosis and Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DB Series Planters

Diagnosis and Repair

For complete service information also see:

John Deere Seeding Group

TM2091 (26JAN06) DB Series Planters

SECTION 240—Electrical Diagnosis and Test 270

All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on

TM2091 (26JAN06) i DB Series Planters

TM2091 (26JAN06) ii DB Series Planters

Group 05—Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-05-1

Group 15—General Information

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-1 DB Series Planters

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-2 DB Series Planters

This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol

Understand Signal Words

A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is

DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near

Handle Fluids Safely—Avoid Fires

When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near

Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Do not

Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-1 DB Series Planters

Be prepared if a fire starts.

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.

Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,

Avoid Harmful Asbestos Dust

Avoid breathing dust that may be generated when

Components in products that may contain asbestos fibers

Avoid creating dust. Never use compressed air for

Keep bystanders away from the area.

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-2 DB Series Planters

Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep

Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is

Securely support any machine elements that must be

Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. Fix

On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground

On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-3 DB Series Planters

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid

Park Machine Safely

Before working on the machine:

• Lower all equipment to the ground.

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-4 DB Series Planters

Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground

When implements or attachments are used with a

Wear Protective Clothing

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-5 DB Series Planters

Chemicals used in agricultural applications such as

Reduce risk of exposure and injury:

TM2091 (26JAN06) 10-05-6 DB Series Planters

This enclosed cab does not protect against inhaling

Clean your shoes or boots to remove soil or other

Clean Vehicle of Hazardous Pesticides

CAUTION: During application of hazardous

When exposed to hazardous pesticides, clean exterior

1. Sweep or vacuum the floor of cab.

2. Clean headliners and inside cowlings of cab.

3. Wash entire exterior of vehicle.